Mercedes Benz 2003 Slk 230 Kompressor Users Manual R170

2002 SLK 32 AMG 2003_slk230_slk320_slk32

2015-02-05

: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2003-Slk-230-Kompressor-Users-Manual-398431 mercedes-benz-2003-slk-230-kompressor-users-manual-398431 mercedes-benz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 304 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

SLK 230 Kompressor
SLK 320
SLK 32 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demon-
stration of your trust in our company
name. Further, it exemplifies your desire to
own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef-
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passen-
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
ment of time:
앫Please read this manual carefully be-
fore putting it aside. Then return it to
your vehicle where it will be handy for
your reference.
앫Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are de-
signed to acquaint you with the opera-
tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
cupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction.......................................... 7
Product information................................ 7
Operator’s Manual .................................. 8
Service and warranty information ..... 8
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles ............. 9
Maintenance .................................. 10
Roadside Assistance ...................... 10
Change of address or ownership.... 10
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada......................... 11
Where to find it.................................... 12
Symbols............................................... 13
Operating safety .................................. 14
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 14
Problems with your vehicle.................. 15
Reporting safety defects...................... 16
Reporting safety defects ................ 16
At a glance ......................................... 17
Cockpit ................................................ 18
Instrument cluster ............................... 20
Center console .................................... 23
Upper part ...................................... 23
Lower Part ...................................... 24
Overhead control panel ........................ 25
Getting started ................................... 27
Unlocking ............................................. 28
Unlocking with the remote control.. 28
Adjusting .............................................. 30
Seats............................................... 30
Telescoping steering column* ........ 34
Mirrors ............................................ 35
Driving .................................................. 37
Fastening the seat belts.................. 37
Starting the engine ......................... 40
Switching on headlamps ................. 43
Turn signals and high beam ............ 43
Windshield wipers........................... 44
Problems while driving.................... 45
Parking and locking .............................. 47
Parking brake.................................. 47
Switching off headlamps................. 48
Turning off engine ........................... 48
Safety and Security ........................... 51
Occupant safety ................................... 52
Airbags ........................................... 53
Seat belts ....................................... 57
Children in the vehicle .................... 60
Panic alarm .......................................... 65
Activating........................................ 65
Deactivating.................................... 65
Driving safety systems ......................... 66
ABS................................................. 66
BAS................................................. 68
ESP ................................................. 68
Anti-theft systems ................................ 71
Immobilizer ..................................... 71
Anti-theft alarm system .................. 71
Tow-away alarm .............................. 72
Controls in detail................................ 73
Locking and unlocking.......................... 74
Keys................................................ 74
Opening the trunk........................... 77
Closing the trunk ............................ 77
Opening the doors from the inside . 78
Trunk lid emergency release........... 78
Contents
Automatic central locking .............. 78
Locking and unlocking
from the inside ............................... 80
Seats.................................................... 81
Heated seats* ................................ 81
Head restraints............................... 82
Lighting ................................................ 83
Exterior lamp switch....................... 83
Combination switch........................ 84
Hazard warning flasher................... 85
Interior lighting............................... 86
Instrument cluster ............................... 88
Instrument cluster illumination....... 88
Coolant temperature gauge............ 88
Trip odometer................................. 89
Tachometer .................................... 89
Outside temperature indicator ....... 90
Setting clock .................................. 90
Manual transmission............................ 91
Shifting into reverse ....................... 92
Automatic transmission* ..................... 93
One-touch gearshifting................... 94
Gear ranges.................................... 95
Gear selector lever position ........... 96
Program mode selector switch....... 97
Accelerator position ....................... 98
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ........................ 98
Good visibility ...................................... 99
Rear view mirror............................. 99
Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 100
Sun visors .................................... 101
Climate control .................................. 102
Setting the temperature............... 104
Adjusting air volume .................... 104
Adjusting air distribution.............. 104
Air recirculation mode.................. 105
Rear window defroster ................. 105
Air conditioning ............................ 106
Residual heat ............................... 107
Basic settings............................... 108
Special settings............................ 108
Deactivating the climate control
system ......................................... 110
Audio system ..................................... 111
Audio and telephone, operation ... 111
Operating safety........................... 111
Operating and display elements... 112
Anti-theft system.......................... 114
Button and soft key operation...... 115
Operation ..................................... 115
Radio mode.................................. 116
Cassette mode............................. 118
CD mode...................................... 120
Telephone* operation .................. 123
Power windows.................................. 127
Opening and closing
the side windows ......................... 127
Retractable hardtop........................... 129
Opening and closing
the retractable hardtop ................ 129
Wind screen ................................. 134
Driving systems ................................. 136
Cruise control .............................. 136
Useful features .................................. 139
Interior storage spaces ................ 139
Ashtray ........................................ 142
Cigarette lighter ........................... 143
Telephone* .................................. 143
Tele Aid ........................................ 144
Garage door opener ..................... 152
Operation ......................................... 157
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 158
Driving instructions ........................... 159
Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 159
Drinking and driving ..................... 159
Contents
Pedals .......................................... 159
Power assistance ......................... 160
Brakes.......................................... 160
Driving off .................................... 161
Parking......................................... 161
Tires ............................................. 162
Hydroplaning................................ 163
Tire traction ................................. 163
Tire speed rating .......................... 163
Winter driving instructions ........... 164
Standing water............................. 165
Passenger compartment .............. 165
Driving abroad.............................. 165
Control and operation
of radio transmitter ...................... 166
Catalytic converter....................... 166
Emission control .......................... 167
Coolant temperature.................... 167
At the gas station .............................. 169
Check regularly and before
a long trip..................................... 170
Engine compartment ......................... 171
Hood ............................................ 171
Engine oil ..................................... 172
Transmission fluid level................ 176
Coolant ........................................ 176
Battery .......................................... 178
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*.......... 179
Tires and wheels................................. 180
Important guidelines ..................... 180
Life of tire ..................................... 181
Direction of rotation...................... 181
Checking tire inflation pressure .... 181
Rotating wheels ............................ 182
Winter driving ..................................... 183
Winter tires ................................... 183
Block heater (Canada only) ........... 184
Snow chains.................................. 184
Maintenance....................................... 185
Clearing the service indicator ....... 185
Service term exceeded ................. 186
Calling up the service indicator..... 186
Resetting the service indicator ..... 186
Vehicle care........................................ 187
Cleaning and care of vehicle......... 187
Practical hints .................................. 193
What to do if ...................................... 194
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 194
Additional indicators in the
speedometer display .................... 204
Lamp in center console ................ 205
Where will I find ...? ............................ 206
First aid kit.................................... 206
Vehicle tool kit.............................. 206
Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 210
Unlocking the vehicle ................... 210
Locking the vehicle ....................... 211
Changing batteries
in remote control .......................... 212
Synchronizing remote control....... 213
Fuel filler flap................................ 213
Manually unlocking the
transmission selector lever........... 214
Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 215
Raising retractable hardtop
manually ....................................... 215
Replacing bulbs .................................. 221
Bulbs............................................. 221
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 223
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 225
Adjusting headlamp aim
(Halogen headlamps only) ............ 226
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 228
Removing...................................... 228
Contents
Installing....................................... 228
Flat tire .............................................. 229
Preparing the vehicle.................... 229
Sealing tires with TIREFIT kit 1 ..... 229
Sealing tires with TIREFIT kit 2 ..... 234
Mounting the spare wheel ............ 238
Battery ............................................... 245
Disconnecting the battery ............ 246
Removing the battery ................... 246
Charging and reinstalling battery . 246
Reconnecting the battery ............. 246
Jump starting ..................................... 247
Towing the vehicle ............................. 249
Towing eye ................................... 251
Installing towing eye bolt.............. 252
Fuses ................................................. 253
Main fuse box............................... 253
Auxiliary fuse box ......................... 254
Technical data.................................. 255
Spare parts service ............................ 256
Warranty coverage............................. 257
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet...................... 257
Identification labels............................ 258
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 259
SLK 230 Kompressor ................... 259
SLK 320 ....................................... 259
SLK 32 AMG................................. 259
Engine................................................ 260
Rims and Tires ................................... 261
Same size tires............................. 262
Mixed size tires ............................ 263
Spare wheel with collapsible tire.. 265
Electrical system ............................... 266
Main Dimensions ............................... 267
Weights.............................................. 268
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .......... 269
Capacities .................................... 269
Engine oils.................................... 271
Engine oil additives ...................... 271
Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 271
Brake fluid.................................... 271
Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 272
Fuel requirements ........................ 272
Gasoline additives ........................ 272
Coolants....................................... 273
Windshield and headlamp*
washer system ............................. 275
Consumer information ....................... 276
Uniform tire quality grading ......... 276
Technical terms............................... 279
Index................................................. 285
7
Product information
Introduction
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz orig-
inal parts as well as conversion parts and
accessories explicitly approved by us for
your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and their special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in indi-
vidual cases an official approval or authori-
zation by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and acces-
sories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories ap-
proved by us are available at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
receive comprehensive information, also
on permissible technical modifications,
and where proper installation will be per-
formed.
8
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam-
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail-
ure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper proce-
dures.
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-
mation, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instruc-
tions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Book-
let are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
앫New Car Limited Warranty,
앫Emission System Warranty,
앫Emission Performance Warranty,
앫California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only),
앫State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au-
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or mal-
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or mal-
function results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de-
fect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have direct-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different sub-
stantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
The Service Booklet describes all the nec-
essary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Service Booklet with you
when you take the vehicle to your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
The service advisor will record each ser-
vice in the booklet for you.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram brochure in your glove box.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser-
vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty In-
formation Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-
eign countries, please be aware that:
앫Service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
앫unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
alytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫gasoline may have a considerably low-
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
12
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. For you to
find information quickly each section has
its own reference color:
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
ing or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you wil l find descriptions of the safe ty
features of your vehicle.
Controls in detail
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehi-
cle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehi-
cle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Technical data
All important technical data for your vehi-
cle can be found in this section.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫this Operator’s Manual
앫the Service Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehi-
cle.
13
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
* Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehi-
cle.
왘This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
-> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to
cross-reference term defini-
tions.
Display
Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
Warning! G
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
ards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
14
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫the safety precautions in this manual
앫the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫traffic rules and regulations
앫motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
dards
Warning! G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are in-
terconnected, any modification made may
produce an undesired effect on other sys-
tems.
Electronic system malfunctions could seri-
ously impair the operating safety of your ve-
hicle.
Ensure that any repairs or modifications to
electronic components are carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore nev-
er turn off the engine while driving.
15
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
16
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.
17
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Center console
Overhead control panel
18
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
19
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page
1Combination switch
앫Turn signals 43
앫Windshield wipers 44
앫High beam 43
2Cruise control lever 136
3Instrument cluster 20, 88
4Voice control system* le-
ver (see separate operat-
ing instructions)
5Steering lock with ignition 29
6Overhead control panel 25
7Glove box 139
8Center console 23, 24
9Horn
10 Steering wheel adjustment
handle*
34
11 Hood lock release 171
12 Exterior lamp switch 43
20
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page
1Left indicator lamps
with:
WLow windshield
washer and head-
lamp washer* sys-
tem fluid level
warning lamp
200
/Low engine coolant
level warning lamp
201
NLow engine oil level
warning lamp
200
1Supplemental re-
straint system indi-
cator lamp
52,
197
2Brake pad wear in-
dicator lamp
202
?Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
199
_Telescoping steer-
ing column warning
lamp*
200
Item Page
2Warning display with:
DCoolant tempera-
ture gauge
88
AFuel gauge with fuel
reserve warning
lamp
201
Outside temperature
indicator
90
3Knob for:
앫Instrument cluster illu-
mination
88
앫Resetting trip odome-
ter
89
앫Activating Flexible Ser-
vice System (FSS) indi-
cator
185
4Speedometer with:
LTurn signal
Kindicator lamps
vElectronic Stability
Program (ESP)
warning lamp
68,
194
Trip odometer 89
Main odometer
5Knob for:
앫Setting clock 90
6Tachometer with:
Selector lever position 41, 93
Digital clock 90
7Right indicator lamps
with:
$Exterior lamp failure
indicator lamp
203
AHigh beam head-
lamp indicator
43, 84
#Charge indicator
lamp
202
Item Page
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page
;Brake warning
lamp, except
Canada
47,
198
3Brake warning
lamp, Canada only
¿Brake Assist Sys-
tem (BAS)/Elec-
tronic Stability
Program (ESP) mal-
function indicator
lamp
68,
194
-Antilock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) malfunc-
tion indicator lamp
66,
196
<Seat belt nonusage
warning lamp
57,
199
23
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part Item Page
1Cup holder 140
2Center air outlet adjust-
ment
102
Side air outlet adjustment 102
3Climate control 102
Rear window defroster 105
4Audio system 111
5Seat heater* passenger
side
81
6Anti-theft alarm system in-
dicator lamp
71
Tow-away alarm switch 72
7Central locking switch 78
8Hazard warning flasher
switch – switching on/off
85
9ESP control switch 70
10 Headlamp washer* switch 100
11 Seat heater* driver’s side 81
24
At a glance
Center console
Lower Part Item Page
1Selector lever for
automatic transmission*
96
Gearshift lever for manual
transmission
91
2Storage compartment
3Indicator lamp 762
4Switch for opening/closing
windows on passenger
side
127
5Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
35
6Switch for opening/closing
the hardtop
129
7Storage compartment 140
Cigarette lighter 143
Item Page
8Parking brake lever 42
9Switch for opening/closing
windows on the driver’s
side
127
10 Program mode selector for
automatic transmission*
97
11 Ashtray 142
Coin holder 142
25
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Item Page
1Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone* and
voice control system* (see
separate operating instruc-
tions)
2Interior lighting control 86
3Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
144
4Garage door opener 152
5Rear view mirror 35, 99
26
27
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
28
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func-
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the infor-
mation given here.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will help you with further in-
formation. The corresponding page refer-
ences are at the end of each segment.
Unlocking
Unlocking with the remote control
Remote control with folding key
1Release button for key
2‹Lock button
3ŒUnlock button
4ÂPanic button (컄page 65)
왘Press unlock button Œ on the re-
mote control.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
왘Press release button 1 on the remote
control.
The key folds out.
왘Get in the vehicle and insert the key in
the steering lock (컄page 29).
29
Getting started
Unlocking
Steering lock positions
Steering lock
0For removing key
The steering is locked when the key is
removed from the steering lock. If nec-
essary, move steering wheel slightly to
allow the locking mechanism to en-
gage.
1Power supply to some electrical con-
sumers, such as seat adjustment
2Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3Starting position
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
i
The key can only be withdrawn in
position 0.
If necessary, move steering wheel
slightly to allow the key to be turned
clockwise to position 1.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The key can only be removed from the
steering lock with the gear selector
lever in position P.
!
To prevent accelerated battery dis-
charge and a possible dead battery,
always remove the key from the
steering lock.
30
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Seats
The seats can be adjusted either manually
or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s
equipment.
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas-
tening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively re-
clined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se-
rious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body. Your seat
must be adjusted so that you can correctly
fasten your seat belt (컄page 37).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being ad-
justed.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock your ve-
hicle.
The power seats* can also be operated with
the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
31
Getting started
Adjusting
Manual seat
1Head restraint height
2Backrest tilt
3Seat height
4Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat height
왘Pull up on handle 3.
왘Use your body weight to push the seat
downwards.
왘Lift your weight off the seat to obtain a
higher seat position.
왘Let go of handle 3.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘Pull up on handle 4.
왘Move the seat forward or backward.
왘Check for proper engagement before
driving.
Adjust to a comfortable seating position
that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The posi-
tion should be as far rearward as possible,
consistent with ability to properly operate
controls.
Warning! G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in this vehicle, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
hicle to deactivate the passenger side front
airbag when it is properly installed. Other-
wise they will be struck by the airbag when
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
Infants and small children must be seated in
an appropriate infant or child restraint sys-
tem, which is properly secured with the ve-
hicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
컄컄
32
Getting started
Adjusting
왘Let go of handle 4. The seat should
make an audible click.
Backrest tilt
왘Turn handwheel 2 forward or backward
until your arms are slightly angled
when holding the steering wheel.
Head restraint height
왘Adjust the height of the head restraints
by pulling them upwards manually.
왘For a lower position, press release
button 1 and push down on the head
restraints manually.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 82).
Power seat*
왘Switch on the ignition by turning the
key in the steering lock to position 2.
or
왘Open the driver’s or passenger door.
The seat adjustment switches are located
on the outer sides of the seats.
1Seat height
2Seat fore and aft adjustment
3Seat cushion tilt
4Backrest tilt
i
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
33
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat height
왘Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 1.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 2.
Adjust to a comfortable seating position
that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The posi-
tion should be as far to the rear as possi-
ble, consistent with ability to properly
operate controls.
Seat cushion tilt
왘Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 3 until your upper legs
are lightly supported.
Backrest tilt
왘Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 4 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
Head restraint height
5Release button
왘Adjust the height of the head restraints
by pulling them upwards manually.
왘For a lower position, press release
button 5 and push down on the head
restraints manually.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 82).
i
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
34
Getting started
Adjusting
Telescoping steering column* Steering wheel adjustment
1Adjustment handle
왘To unlock the steering column, pull out
handle 1 as far as it will go.
왘Move the steering wheel to the desired
position.
왘Push handle 1 back to its original posi-
tion to relock the steering wheel. You
should hear an audible click.
The steering wheel is again fixed into
place.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
ing, or driving without the adjustment
locked could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock your ve-
hicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
!
Do not drive the vehicle until you have
properly locked the steering column.
If the indicator lamp _ comes on
while the engine is running, the steer-
ing column is not locked properly
(컄page 200).
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors
Adjust the inside and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic condi-
tions.
Inside rear view mirror
왘Manually adjust the inside rear view
mirror.
Exterior rear view mirror
The switch is located on the center
console.
1Driver’s side mirror
2Passenger side mirror
왘Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
All the lights in the instrument cluster
light up.
Warning! G
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
low the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory sys-
tem. In case it does, immediately flush af-
fected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
side rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their liq-
uid state and by applying plenty of wa-
ter. 컄컄
36
Getting started
Adjusting
왘Turn switch to position 1 for the left
mirror or to position 2 for the right
mirror.
왘Toggle switch up, down, left or right
according to the setting desired.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 99).
i
At low ambient temperatures, the exte-
rior mirrors will be heated automatical-
ly.
!
If an exterior rear view mirror housing
is forcibly pushed forward or rearward,
reposition it by applying firm pressure
until it snaps into place. The mirror
housing is now properly positioned and
you can adjust the mirror normally.
37
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Fastening the seat belts
Warning! G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot-
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear-
ance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.
Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passenger should al-
ways wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as ex-
pected if the occupants are using their seat
belts (컄page 52).
Warning! G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in this vehicle, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
hicle to deactivate the passenger side front
airbag when it is properly installed. Other-
wise they will be struck by the airbag when
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
38
Getting started
Driving
1Seat belt housing
2Latch plate
3Buckle
4Release button
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best re-
straint when the wearer is in an upright po-
sition and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
Warning! G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
strained with a separate seat belt.
Warning! G
Read and observe the additional warning no-
tices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄page 55) and (컄page 57).
39
Getting started
Driving
왘With a smooth motion, pull the belt
from seat belt housing 1.
왘Place the belt over your shoulder.
왘Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until it
clicks.
왘If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Proper use of seat belts
앫Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫Adjust the seat belt so that the shoul-
der portion is located as close as possi-
ble to the middle of the shoulder (it
should not touch the neck or pass un-
der the arm).
앫Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫Place the seat backrest in a nearly up-
right position.
앫Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫Do not fasten a seat belt around a per-
son and another object at the same
time.
앫Check your seat belt during travel to
ensure that it is properly positioned.
앫Ensure that the seat belt is always fit-
ted snugly. You should avoid wearing
bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
when traveling in the vehicle.
Warning! G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effective-
ness of the belts.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
40
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Manual transmission
Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
Starting
왘Make sure that the gearshift lever is in
Neutral position.
왘Do not depress the accelerator.
왘Fully depress clutch pedal.
Otherwise the engine cannot be start-
ed due to the integrated safety inter-
lock.
왘Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 3. Release when the engine is
firing regularly (컄page 29).
For information on turning off the engine
(컄page 48).
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 91).
Warning! G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as garage) which are not properly ven-
tilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes
are entering the vehicle while driving, have
the cause determined and corrected imme-
diately. If you must drive under these condi-
tions, drive only with at least one window
fully open.
41
Getting started
Driving
Automatic transmission*
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
PPark position with selector lever lock
RReverse gear
NNeutral
DDrive position
Starting
왘Make sure that the gear selector lever
is set to P .
왘Do not depress the accelerator.
왘Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 3. Release when the engine is
firing regularly (컄page 29).
왘Depress the brake pedal.
The selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine
(컄page 48).
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 93).
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘Turn the key in steering lock to
position 0 and repeat starting proce-
dure.
Remember that extended starting at-
tempts can drain the battery
왘Get a jump start (컄page 247).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a mal-
function in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
!
Ensure that the brake pedal is de-
pressed when starting the engine.
42
Getting started
Driving
Parking brake
1Brake lever
2Release button
왘Pull up slightly on brake lever 1 and
press release button 2.
Return brake lever 1 down to its origi-
nal position.
The indicator lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Driving
왘Depress the brake pedal.
왘Move selector lever to position D or R
(manual transmission: first or reverse
gear)
왘Release the brake pedal.
왘Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the auto-
matic central locking system engages
and the locking knobs drop down.
After a cold start, the automatic transmis-
sion engages at a higher revolution. This al-
lows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Children could release the parking
brake, which could result in an accident or
serious injury.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
!
If you hear a warning signal when driv-
ing off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
43
Getting started
Driving
Switching on headlamps
Exterior lamp switch
1Off
2Low beam headlamps on
왘Turn the switch to B.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 83).
Turn signals and high beam
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.
Combination switch
1Turn signals, right
2Turn signals, left
왘Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
Warning! G
Vehicles with automatic transmission: It is
dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P
or N if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control
of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
!
Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re-
duces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
44
Getting started
Driving
High beam
왘Push the combination switch forward.
The high beam symbol A in the
instrument cluster lights up.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 85).
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.
Combination switch
1Switching on windshield wipers
2Single wipe
왘Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
Switching on windshield wipers
왘Turn the combination switch to the de-
sired position depending on the inten-
sity of the rain.
0Windshield wipers off
IIntermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal blinks three times.
i
Fast wiper speed III goes to setting II
when the vehicle is standing still.
45
Getting started
Driving
Single wipe
왘Press switch briefly in the direction of
arrow 2.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘Push switch in the direction of arrow 2
past the resistance point.
The windshield wiper operates with
washer fluid.
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
앫An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫The engine electronics may not be op-
erating properly.
앫Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘Give very little gas.
왘Have the problem repaired by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
!
If leaves, snow, etc. block the wind-
shield wipers, switch off the wipers.
앫For safety reasons, withdraw the
key from the steering lock. Remove
blockage.
앫Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position I,
앫set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed.
앫have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
46
Getting started
Driving
The coolant temperature is over 248°F
(120°C)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
왘Check the coolant level and add cool-
ant if necessary (컄page 176).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘Do not start the engine under any cir-
cumstances.
왘Notify local fire and/or police authori-
ties.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
termined:
왘Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫major assemblies
앫fuel system
앫engine mount
왘Start the engine in the usual manner.
47
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Parking brake
1Brake lever
2Release button
왘Pull up brake lever 1 firmly.
When the engine is running, the indica-
tor lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
Warning! G
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re-
moving the key from the starter switch. The
vehicle cannot be steered when the key is
removed.
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
system. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to stop or steer the vehi-
cle.
Warning! G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫Pull up the brake lever firmly.
앫Move the selector lever to position P
(manual transmission: first or reverse
gear).
앫Slowly release brake pedal.
앫When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫Turn the key to steering lock position 0
and remove.
48
Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄page 43).
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 83).
Turning off engine
왘Place the gear selector lever in
position P (manual transmission: first
or reverse gear).
왘Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 0 (컄page 29) and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Children could release the parking
brake and/or move the gear selector lever
from position P, either of which could result
in an accident and/or serious injury.
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
lever not fully engaged in position P is dan-
gerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (manual transmission:
first or reverse gear).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheel
towards the road curb. i
Always set the parking brake in addi-
tion to shifting to position P (manual
transmission: first or reverse gear).
i
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the road curb.
49
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘Press the seat belt release button
(컄page 38).
왘After exiting the vehicle, press the lock
button ‹ on the remote control
(컄page 28).
The turn signal lamps blink three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move
down.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 74).
i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The key can only be removed from the
steering lock with the gear selector
lever in position P.
!
With the key removed and the driver’s
door open, a warning sounds if the ve-
hicle’s exterior lamps (except standing
lamps) are not switched off.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock your ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
50
51
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
52
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im-
portant facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
앫Seat belts
앫Emergency tensioning device
앫Airbags
앫Child seats
앫Child seat recognition
As independent systems their protective
effects work in conjunction with each oth-
er.
The 1warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up for about 4 seconds when
you turn the key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2. It goes out when you start
the engine. This shows that the restraint
systems are operational.
If the lamp does not come on at all or if it
fails to extinguish after approximately
4 seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a
malfunction in the system has been de-
tected.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 197).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
straint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄page 60).
Warning! G
In the event that the SRS malfunction indica-
tor lamp lights up during driving or does not
come on at all, the SRS may not be opera-
tional. For your safety, we strongly recom-
mend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in inju-
ry.
Improper work on the restraint systems, in-
cluding incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unin-
tended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be per-
formed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
53
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Airbags
Warning! G
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential
of injury in certain frontal (front airbags) im-
pacts, or side (side impact airbags) impacts
which may cause significant injuries. How-
ever, no system available today can totally
eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releas-
es a small amount of dust from the airbags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some tempo-
rary breathing difficulty for people with asth-
ma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
Warning! G
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and passenger to always be in a prop-
erly seated position and to wear your seat
belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Oc-
cupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously in-
jured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
앫Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the seat back-
rest.
앫Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
tion of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breast-
bone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least ten
inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combina-
tion of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any prob-
lems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dash-
board.
앫Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
side the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
앫Adjust the passenger seat as far as pos-
sible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied.
54
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the side impact airbag in-
flates. This could result in serious inju-
ries or death should the airbag be
triggered. Always sit upright, properly
use the seat belts and appropriate size
infant or child restraint system.
앫Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in this vehicle, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
vate the passenger side front airbag
when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, seri-
ous or fatal injury will result.
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
sult in severe injuries to you or other occu-
pants.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
to make the buyer aware of these points. Be
sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manu-
al.
Warning! G
Should you choose to place a child 12 years
old or under in the passenger seat of your
vehicle, you must properly use a
BabySmartTM child restraint which will turn
off the front passenger airbag. BabySmartTM
will not, however, turn off any side impact
airbag.
It should be noted that with respect to both
side impact airbags there is a possibility for
a side impact airbag related injury if occu-
pants, especially children, are not properly
seated or restrained when next to a side im-
pact airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in
a side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side impact airbag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the side impact airbag be activated.
(2) Always sit upright, properly use the seat
belts and use an appropriately sized in-
fant or child restraint system for all chil-
dren 12 years old or under.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
passenger seat occupants to have the pas-
senger side impact airbag deactivated, then
deactivation can be accomplished upon
your written request to do so at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional
cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
airbag
i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts,
or side (side impact airbags) impacts
which exceed preset thresholds.
Only during these types of impacts, if of
sufficient severity to meet the deploy-
ment thresholds, will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should al-
ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the airbags to pro-
vide their supplemental protection.
In cases of other frontal impacts, an-
gled impacts, roll-overs, other side im-
pacts, rear collisions, or other
accidents the airbags will not be acti-
vated. The driver and passengers will
then be protected by the fastened seat
belts.
We caution you not to rely on the pres-
ence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags that are designed to acti-
vate in certain impacts exceeding a pre-
set threshold to reduce the potential
and severity of injury. It is important to
your safety and that of your passengers
that you replace deployed airbags and
repair any malfunctioning airbags to en-
sure that the vehicle will continue to
provide supplemental crash protection
for occupants.
Warning! G
앫Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts in-
stalled or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫Airbags and ETDs are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. An airbag
or emergency tensioning device (ETD)
that was activated must be replaced.
앫No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or re-
moving any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger airbag cover, door
trim panels, or door frame trims, and in-
stallation of additional electrical/elec-
tronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring. Keep area be-
tween airbags and occupants free from
objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrel-
las, etc.).
앫Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
1Driver airbag
2Passenger airbag
3Side impact airbags
Front airbags
Driver and passenger airbags are de-
ployed:
앫in the event of a frontal impact
앫if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫independently of the side impact air-
bags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
ed by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger airbag will only be deployed
if:
앫the passenger seat is occupied
앫the 7indicator lamp in the center
console is not lit (컄page 62).
앫An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
has inflated. Do not touch.
앫Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unin-
tended activation of the SRS.
앫In addition, through improper work
there is a risk of rendering the SRS inop-
erative or causing unintended airbag de-
ployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be fol-
lowed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abra-
sions or other injuries resulting from air-
bag deployment.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Side impact airbags
The side impact airbags are deployed:
앫on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
ment threshold
앫independently of the front airbags
The side impact airbags will not deploy in
impacts which do not exceed the system’s
deployment threshold.
The passenger side impact airbag will only
be deployed if the system senses that the
passenger seat is occupied.
Seat belts
The seat belt nonusage warning lamp <
in the instrument cluster lights up and a
warning sounds for a short time when you
turn the key in the steering lock to
position 2 and the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened.
After starting the engine, the seat belt non-
usage warning lamp blinks for a brief peri-
od to remind the driver and passengers to
fasten the seat belts.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in
most states and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fas-
tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
Information on fastening seat belts is
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄page 37).
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the passenger seat.
This could cause the front or side im-
pact airbag on the passenger side to
deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system's deployment threshold.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
straint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄page 60).
58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passenger should al-
ways wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best re-
straint when the wearer is in an upright po-
sition and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
Warning! G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
strained with a separate seat belt.
Warning! G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Have all work carried out only by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this sec-
tion, as that could result in serious inju-
ries in case of an accident.
앫Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver airbag, pas-
senger airbag, side impact airbags, ETD
(seat belt emergency tensioning device),
and driver knee bolster. The system is
designed to enhance the protection of-
fered to properly belted occupants in
certain frontal (front airbags) and side
(side impact airbags) impacts which ex-
ceed preset deployment thresholds.
앫Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
der. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could se-
verely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
앫Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
might cause injuries.
앫Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdo-
men. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another per-
son or other objects.
앫Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
sure on the abdomen.
앫Never place your feet on the instrument
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD)
The seat belts are equipped with
emergency tensioning devices.
The ETD is designed to activate in the fol-
lowing cases when the seat belts are fas-
tened:
앫in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
ing a preset severity level
앫if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see 1 indica-
tor lamp (컄page 52).
In an impact, emergency tensioning devic-
es remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body.
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.
앫Ensure that the infant or child is prop-
erly secured by a belt at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and infor-
mation on choosing an appropriate re-
straint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Infant and child restraint systems
Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child
restraint for the passenger seat in this
vehicle.
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Warning! G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When scrapping the emergency tensioning
device, our safety instructions must be fol-
lowed. These are available at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the passenger seat.
This could cause the front or side im-
pact airbag on the passenger side to
deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system's deployment threshold.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a spe-
cial seat belt retractor for secure fastening
of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child re-
straint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratch-
eting sound can be heard to indicate that
the special seat belt retractor is activated.
The belt is now locked. Push down on child
restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual man-
ner.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
Warning! G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the
District of Columbia, the U.S. territo-
ries and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap shoulder belt that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Ve-
hicle Safety Standard 213.
A statement by the child restraint man-
ufacturer of compliance with this stan-
dard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruc-
tion manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.
Warning! G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in this vehicle, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
hicle to deactivate the passenger side front
airbag when it is properly installed. Other-
wise they will be struck by the airbag when
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury can result.
Infants and small children must be seated in
an appropriate BabySmartTM compatible in-
fant or child restraint system, which is prop-
erly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,
fully in accordance with the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
17 indicator lamp
Special BabySmartTM compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are
required for use with the BabySmartTM air-
bag deactivation system. With the special
child seat properly installed, the passenger
front airbag will not deploy.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
Children too big for child restraint systems
should use regular seat belts. Position the
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck. A booster seat may be neces-
sary to achieve proper belt positioning for
children from 41 lbs. until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits proper-
ly without a booster.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
When the child restraint is not in use, re-
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
cident.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle; even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
hicle equipment and may cause serious
personal injury.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The 7indicator lamp located in the
center console will be illuminated, except
with the key removed or in the steering
lock position 0.
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
After turning the key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2, the 7indicator lamp
located in the center console lights up for
approx. 6 seconds and then goes out.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
is continuously lit, the system is not func-
tioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any
child on the passenger seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 205).
i
The system does not deactivate the
side impact airbag and the emergency
tensioning device.
Warning! G
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys-
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-
tem. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag will not deploy only if
the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminat-
ed.
Please be sure to check the indicator every
time you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
Warning! G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
passenger seat. Signals from such devices
may interfere with the BabySmartTM system.
Such signal interference may cause
the 7 indicator lamp not to come on
during self-test or be continuously lit, indi-
cating that the system is not functioning.
65
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Panic alarm
1Âbutton
An audible alarm and blinking exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
21⁄2minutes.
Activating
왘Press and hold button 1 for at least
1second.
Deactivating
왘Press button 1 again
or
왘Insert key in steering lock and turn to
position 2.
i
For operation in the USA only: This de-
vice complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
66
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
앫ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫BAS (Brake Assist System)
앫ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
ABS
The ABS regulates the brake pressure so
that the wheels do not lock during braking.
This allows you to maintain the ability to
steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady
pressure on the brake pedal while experi-
encing the pulsation.
i
In winter operation, the maximum ef-
fectiveness of the ABS and ESP is only
achieved with winter tires (M+S tires),
or snow chains as required.
Warning! G
The following factors increase the risk of ac-
cidents:
앫Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫Following another vehicle too closely
The ABS, BAS and ESP cannot reduce this
risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions.
Warning! G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
67
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and ability to steer
the vehicle.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
spond even with light brake pressure. The
pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions and func-
tions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.
ABS control
The - malfunction indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up when you
turn the key in the steering lock to
position 2. It goes out when the engine is
running.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 196).
i
To alert following vehicles to slippery
road conditions you discover, operate
your hazard warning flashers as appro-
priate.
Warning! G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
er’s safety or the safety of others.
68
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
tially reducing braking distance. Apply con-
tinuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP
is combined with that of the BAS.
The ¿ malfunction indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up when you
turn the key in the steering lock to
position 2. It goes out when the engine is
running.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section.
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle's traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slip-
pery road surfaces.
The ESP warning lamp v in the speed-
ometer dial flashes when the ESP is en-
gaged.
The warning lamp v in the speedome-
ter dial lights up when you turn the key in
the steering lock to position 2. It goes out
when the engine is running.
Warning! G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, following an-
other vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
69
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 194).
Warning! G
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
ESP warning lamp v flashing in the
speedometer dial. In this case proceed as
follows:
앫While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible
앫While driving ease up on the accelerator
앫Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
Warning! G
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
er’s safety or the safety of others.
!
Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
tion, the engine must be shut off (key in
steering lock position 0 or 1) when
앫the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer
앫the vehicle is being towed with the
front axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the
rear axle brake system.
The ESP will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size.
70
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP
To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have drive wheels spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
such as:
앫starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
앫sand or gravel
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
1ESP off
2ESP on
왘Press upper half 1 of the ESP switch
until the ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer lights up.
The ESP is deactivated.
If one or more drive wheels are spinning,
the ESP warning lamp v in the speed-
ometer flashes, regardless of the speed.
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
even when ESP is deactivated.
ESP always operates when you are brak-
ing, even when it has been deactivated.
Switching on the ESP
왘Press lower half 2 of the ESP switch.
The ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer goes out. You are now
again in normal driving mode.
Warning! G
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circum-
stances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
dard driving maneuvers.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
When the ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
71
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Activating
앫Removing the key from the steering
lock activates the immobilizer.
Deactivating
앫Inserting the key in the steering lock
deactivates the immobilizer.
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
앫a door
앫the trunk
앫the hood.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed within approxi-
mately 10 seconds after locking the vehi-
cle. The indicator lamp in the switch for the
tow-away alarm (컄page 72) will then
blink.
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the remote con-
trol.
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm:
왘Insert the key in the steering lock.
or
왘Press the Œ or ‹ button.
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
tem provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated,
and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.
72
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
Arming tow-away alarm
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed after about
30 seconds.
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms automatical-
ly.
Disarming tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm be-
fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on
a surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
1Tow-away alarm off switch
2Indicator lamp
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
왘Turn off the ignition and remove the
key.
왘Press upper half 1 of the switch.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights up
briefly.
왘Lock your vehicle with the key or re-
mote control.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un-
til you lock your vehicle again.
i
The tow-away protection alarm is trig-
gered, for example, if the vehicle is lift-
ed on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
tem provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated,
and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.
i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
if the ignition is turned on.
73
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission*
Good visibility
Climate control
Audio system
Power windows
Retractable hardtop
Driving systems
Useful features
74
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed in your vehicle.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will
be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are giv-
en at the beginning of each segment.
Locking and unlocking
Keys
More information on the remote control
with folding key can be found in the “Get-
ting started” section (컄page 28).
Your vehicle comes supplied with two re-
mote controls with folding key.
The remote control provides an extended
operating range. To prevent theft, howev-
er, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle
when you are in close proximity to it.
The remote control centrally locks and un-
locks:
앫the doors
앫the trunk
앫the fuel filler flap
앫the storage compartment in armrest
You can lock and unlock each individual
lock with the key.
Remote control with folding key
1ŒUnlock button
2‹Lock button
3Release button for key
4Battery check lamp
5ÂPanic button (컄page 65)
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the remote control to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
75
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘Press button Œ.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
locking if neither door nor trunk is opened,
the key is not inserted in the steering lock,
or the central locking switch is not
activated.
Global locking
왘Press button ‹.
All turn signal lamps blink three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the remote control so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door, the storage compartment in the arm-
rest and the fuel filler flap.
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-
til battery check lamp 4 blinks twice.
The remote control will then function
as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door, storage com-
partment in armrest and fuel filler flap
왘Press button Œ once.
Global unlocking
왘Press button Œ twice.
Global locking
왘Press button ‹.
Restoring to factory setting
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds un-
til battery check lamp 4 blinks twice.
i
If the turn signal lamps do not blink
three times, one of the following ele-
ments may not be properly closed:
앫a door
앫the trunk
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
76
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking the batteries
왘Press button ‹ or Œ longer than
1second.
The battery check lamp 4 lights up
briefly to indicate that the key batteries
are in order.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. It is possible for children to open a
locked door from the inside, which could re-
sult in an accident and/or serious injury.
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the remote control, then
either the batteries in the remote con-
trol are discharged, the remote control
is malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery
is drained.
앫Check the batteries in the remote
control and replace them if neces-
sary (컄page 212)
or
앫Synchronize the remote control
(컄page 213)
or
앫Use the folding key to unlock the
doors (컄page 210) and the trunk
(컄page 210) as required. Lock the
vehicle using the folding key
(컄page 211).
If the remote control is malfunctioning,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
!
If battery check lamp 4 does not light
up briefly during the check, then the re-
mote control batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄page 212).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
77
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Loss of remote control with folding key
If you lose a remote control or the folding
key, you should do the following:
왘Have the remote control deactivated
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘Report the loss of the remote control or
the folding key immediately to your car
insurance company.
왘If necessary have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
ment.
Opening the trunk
The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
1Trunk lid lock
2Handle
왘Pull handle 2 and lift the trunk lid.
The trunk can also be opened from the in-
side in an emergency, see trunk lid emer-
gency release (컄page 78).
Closing the trunk
The recess is located on the inner side of
the trunk lid.
1Recess
왘Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
recess 1.
i
The vehicle must be unlocked. Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk lid.
Be especially careful when small children
are around.
78
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the in-
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
1Inside door handle
왘Pull on door handle 1.
If a door was locked, the locking knob
will move up.
Trunk lid emergency release
The handle for the trunk lid emergency
release is located in the trunk lid.
1Handle
왘Pull handle 1 in direction of arrow to
open the trunk lid.
Automatic central locking
Factory setting
The doors and the trunk automatically lock
when the ignition is switched on and the
left front wheel turns at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the in-
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
Warning! G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-
or.
i
The anti-theft alarm system is triggered
when the trunk is opened from the
inside and the vehicle was previously
centrally locked.
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact ex-
ceeds a preset threshold.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic cen-
tral locking when the vehicle
앫is pushed or
앫is on a test stand
79
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Individual setting
You can deactivate the automatic central
locking. The central locking switch is locat-
ed on the upper center console.
Central locking switch
1Locking
2Unlocking
왘Check that the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
왘Press and hold lower part 2 of the cen-
tral locking switch for approximately
5seconds.
The automatic central locking is deacti-
vated.
Restoring to factory setting
왘Check that the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
왘Press and hold upper part 1 of the cen-
tral locking switch for approximately
5seconds.
The automatic central locking is acti-
vated.
80
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from in-
side using the central locking switch. This
can be useful, for example, if you want to
unlock the passenger door from the inside
or want to lock the vehicle before starting
to drive.
Locking
왘Press upper part 1 of central locking
switch (컄page 79).
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
왘Press lower part 2 of central locking
switch (컄page 79).
The vehicle unlocks if not previously
centrally locked with the remote con-
trol.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
If you have locked the vehicle with the
remote control, the central locking
switch does not work.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
81
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄page 30).
Heated seats*
The seat heater switches are located in the
center console.
1Normal heating
2Rapid heating
왘Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
Switching on seat heating
왘Press upper switch position 1.
One indicator lamp on the switch lights
up.
Switching on rapid seat heating
왘Press lower switch position 2.
Both indicator lamps on the switch light
up.
Switching off seat heating
왘If one indicator lamp is on, press upper
switch position 1.
왘If both indicator lamps are on, press
lower switch position 2.
!
If one or both of the indicator lamps on
the seat heater switch are blinking,
there is insufficient voltage available
since too many electrical consumers
are turned on. The seat heater switches
off automatically.
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as suffi-
cient voltage is available.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only one indicator lamp re-
mains lit.
i
The seat heater will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.
82
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraints Removing head restraint
1Lock button
왘Open the retractable hardtop
(컄page 129).
왘Pull head restraint to its highest
position.
왘Press lock button 1 and pull out head
restraint.
Installing head restraint
왘Insert head restraint and push it down
until it engages.
왘Adjust head restraint to desired posi-
tion (컄page 32) or (컄page 33).
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
i
SLK 32 AMG has integrated,
non-removable head restraints.
!
Be sure to install the head restraint so
that it is facing in the right direction.
Otherwise you could damage the
mounting.
83
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the head-
lamps and use the turn signals, see the
“Getting started” section (컄page 43).
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
Exterior lamp switch
MOff
CParking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only: When engine is run-
ning, the low beam is also switched
on.
BLow beam plus parking lamps or
high beam headlamps (combination
switch pushed forward).
ˆStanding lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
Daytime running lamp mode (Canada
only)
Vehicles with automatic transmission
When the engine is running and the
selector lever is in driving position, the low
beam headlamps are automatically
switched on.
When you shift from a driving position to
position N or P, the low beam switches off
(2 seconds delay).
Vehicles with manual transmission
With the engine running, the low beam
headlamps are automatically switched on.
i
If you remove the key and open the
driver’s door while the parking lamps or
low beam headlamps are switched on,
then a warning sounds.
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, the
low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.
84
Controls in detail
Lighting
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam head-
lamps.
Switching on front fog lamps
왘Check that the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
왘Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch lights up.
Switching on rear fog lamp
왘Check that the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
왘Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp switch lights up.
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.
1High beam
2High beam flasher
i
The high beam flasher is always avail-
able.
i
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or low beam headlamps on.
Fog lamps should only be used in con-
junction with low beam headlamps.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding allow-
able lamp operation.
85
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on high beams
왘Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B
왘Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
The high beam symbol is illuminated on
the instrument cluster.
High beam flasher
왘Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2.
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be activat-
ed with the ignition switched on or off. It is
activated automatically when an airbag is
deployed.
The switch is located on the center
console.
1Hazard warning flasher switch
Switching on hazard warning flasher
왘Press hazard warning flasher switch 1.
All the turn signals will blink.
Switching off hazard flasher
왘Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again.
86
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
1Switch for automatic control
2Switch for interior lighting
Automatic control
Activating
왘Turn switch 1 to the right.
Interior lighting is switched on in dark-
ness when you
앫unlock the vehicle
앫open a door
앫open the trunk lid
The interior lighting switches itself off
again after a short pause.
Deactivating
왘Turn switch 1 to the left.
The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness, even when you
앫unlock the vehicle
앫open a door
앫open the trunk lid
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lighting switches off automatically after
approximately five minutes.
87
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control
Activating
왘Press switch 2.
The interior lighting is switched on.
Deactivating
왘Press switch 2 again.
The interior lighting is switched off.
Night security illumination
If you exit the vehicle after driving with the
exterior lighting on, it switches on again for
added security for approximately
30 seconds after closing the last door.
The lamp-on time period can be changed at
your Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
If the interior lighting is switched on
manually, it will not go out automatical-
ly. This could cause the battery to be-
come discharged.
i
The trunk lighting is switched on and
off simultaneously with the interior
lighting.
88
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (컄page 20).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫open the driver’s door
앫turn the key in steering lock to
position 2 (컄page 29)
앫press the left knob 3 (컄page 20)
Instrument cluster illumination
Instrument lamps
To brighten illumination
왘Turn knob 3 (컄page 20) clockwise.
The instrument lamps will brighten.
To dim illumination
왘Turn knob 3 counterclockwise.
The instrument lamps will dim.
Display illumination
왘Press knob 3.
With key removed or in steering lock
position 0 or 1 (컄page 29), the display
is illuminated for a short time.
Coolant temperature gauge
Under normal driving conditions, the cool-
ant temperature may rise to 248°F
(120°C). The coolant temperature may
climb to the red marking:
앫at high outside temperatures
앫during stop-and-go city traffic
앫when driving on hilly terrain
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature in the red zone.
Doing so may cause serious engine dam-
age which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
89
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Trip odometer
왘Press the left knob 3 (컄page 20) once
with key in steering lock position 2
(컄page 29) until the trip odometer is
reset
or
왘Press the left knob 3 (컄page 20) twice
with key removed or in steering lock
position 0 or 1 (컄page 29) until the
trip odometer is reset.
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer
(컄page 20) denotes excessive engine
speed.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
Warning! G
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
i
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious en-
gine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
90
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Outside temperature indicator
When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
perature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Setting clock
Hours
왘Pull out the right knob 5 in the instru-
ment cluster (컄page 20) and turn it
counterclockwise.
Minutes
왘Pull out the right knob 5 in the instru-
ment cluster and turn it clockwise.
Warning! G
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. i
To adjust the time by a single hour or a
few minutes, turn knob 5 just a few de-
grees in the direction indicated for
hours or minutes.
91
Controls in detail
Manual transmission
Manual transmission
Information for driving with a manual
transmission is found in the “Getting start-
ed” section (컄page 40).
Gearshift lever
Do not exceed the maximum speed in the
individual gears. Refer to tachometer
(컄page 89) for engine speeds.
Warning! G
For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-
mission, getting out of your vehicle with the
gearshift lever not engaged in first or re-
verse gear and parking brake engaged is
dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
an engaged first or reverse gear alone may
not prevent your vehicle from moving, possi-
bly hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
engaging first or reverse gear (컄page 47).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could move the gearshift
lever, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.
i
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill
by using the clutch pedal. The clutch
may be damaged which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
92
Controls in detail
Manual transmission
Shifting into reverse
왘Stop the vehicle completely.
왘Pull gearshift lever up and shift in
Rreverse.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces as well as high en-
gine speeds, never downshift in order to ob-
tain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your
vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of
loss of control.
!
Downshifting gears leading to overrev-
ving the engine can result in engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not exceed the engine speed limits
(컄page 89).
93
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Automatic transmission*
Information for driving with an automatic
transmission is found in the “Getting start-
ed” section (컄page 41).
Your transmission adapts its gear shifting
process to your individual driving style by
continually adjusting the shift points up or
down. These shift point adjustments are
performed based on current operating and
driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the au-
tomatic transmission reacts by adjusting
its gear shift program.
The automatic transmission selects indi-
vidual gears automatically, dependent
upon
앫the selector lever position D with gear
ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄page 95)
앫the selected shift program (W/S)
(컄page 97)
앫the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄page 98)
앫the vehicle speed
1Gear range indicator display
The current selector lever position appears
in gear range indicator display 1.
When the selector lever is in position D,
you can influence transmission shifting by
앫limiting the gear range
앫changing gears yourself
i
During the brief warm-up, the transmis-
sion upshifting is delayed. This allows
the catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperatures.
Warning! G
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out
of P or N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the en-
gine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
94
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears yourself when the
selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
왘Briefly press the selector lever to the
left in the D– direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear. This action si-
multaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄page 95).
Upshifting
왘Briefly press the selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simulta-
neously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Canceling gear range limit
왘Press and hold the selector lever in the
D+ direction until Dreappears in the
tachometer display field.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D– direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal accelera-
tion and deceleration. This will involve
shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
i
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the selector lever is moved to the
D– direction, the transmission will not
shift to a lower gear if the engine's
max. speed limit would be exceeded.
95
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Gear ranges
With the selector lever in position D, you
can limit the transmission’s gear range by
pressing the lever to the left (D-), and re-
verse the gear range limit by pressing the
lever to the right (D+).
The selected gear range will appear in the
gear range indicator display (컄page 93). If
you press on the accelerator when the en-
gine has reached its rpm limit, the trans-
mission will upshift beyond any gear range
limit selected.
Gear
range
Effect
éThe transmission shifts
through fourth gear only.
èThe transmission shifts
through third gear only.
With this selection you can
use the braking effect of the
engine.
Gear
range
Effect
çThe transmission shifts
through second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving
앫on steep downgrades
앫in mountainous regions
앫under extreme operating
conditions
æThe transmission operates
only in first gear.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep
or lengthy downgrades.
96
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Gear selector lever position
Effect
PPark position
Selector position when the vehicle
is parked. Only place selector lever
in position P when vehicle is
stopped. The park position is not in-
tended to serve as a brake when
the vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the park-
ing brake in addition to placing the
selector lever in position P to se-
cure the vehicle.
The key can only be removed from
the steering lock with the selector
lever in position P. With the key re-
moved the selector lever is locked
in position P.
Effect
RReverse gear
Place selector lever in position R only
when vehicle is stopped.
NNeutral
No power is transmitted from the en-
gine to the drive axle. When the
brakes are released, the vehicle can
be moved freely (pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission,
never engage N while driving.
If the ESP is deactivated or malfunc-
tioning:
Only move selector lever to N if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g.
on icy roads).
DDrive
The transmission shifts automatical-
ly. All five forward gears are avail-
able.
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with selector lever in N
can result in transmission damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
lever not fully engaged in position P is dan-
gerous. Also, position P alone is not intend-
ed to or capable of preventing your vehicle
from moving, possibly hitting people or ob-
jects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄page 47).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
97
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Program mode selector switch
1Program mode selector switch
S Standard For regular driving
W Winter For winter driving
왘Press the program mode selector
switch.
Select
W
for comfortable driving:
앫The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫Traction and driving stability are im-
proved on icy roads.
앫Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
앫The power transmission ratio for se-
lector lever position R changes de-
pending on the program mode
selected (
W
or
S
).
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could move the selector le-
ver from position P, which could result in an
accident and/or serious injury.
!
Never change the program mode when
the selector lever is out of position P. It
could result in a change of driving char-
acteristics for which you may not be
prepared.
98
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the transmis-
sion’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
More throttle Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
mission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only 2nd gear and reverse gear can
be activated.
왘Stop the vehicle.
왘Move selector lever to P.
왘Turn off the engine.
왘Wait at least 10 seconds before re-
starting.
왘Restart the engine.
왘Move selector lever to position D (for
2nd gear) or R.
왘Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
99
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers
(컄page 44) and for adjusting the rear view
mirrors (컄page 35) is found in the “Get-
ting started” section.
Rear view mirror
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the inside rear view mirror will respond au-
tomatically to glare when
앫the ignition is switched on, and
앫incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the inside rear view mir-
ror.
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫reverse gear is engaged
앫the interior lighting is turned on
앫the wind screen is installed
(컄page 134)
Warning! G
The automatic antiglare function does not
react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the inside rear view mirror.
The inside rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the wind screen is in-
stalled.
Glare can endanger you and others.
Warning! G
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
low the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory sys-
tem. In case it does, immediately flush af-
fected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
100
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Headlamp cleaning system*
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
1Headlamp washer switch
왘Switch on ignition.
왘Briefly press upper part of switch 1.
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
side rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
101
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
1Mirror cover
왘Swing sun visors down when you expe-
rience glare.
왘Push mirror cover 1 to the side, as
required.
Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
102
Controls in detail
Climate control
Climate control
103
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenev-
er the engine is running. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the se-
lected interior temperature and the cur-
rent outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
Item
1Windshield air vent
2Side window defroster vent,
adjustable
3Air volume control for side air vents
4Side air vent, adjustable
5Temperature selectors, right and
left side passenger compartment
6Air distribution control switch
7Residual heat/air recirculation
8AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)
9Air volume control switch
10 Rear window defroster
11 Center air vents, adjustable
12 Air volume control for center air
vents
Warning! G
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
The selected temperature is reached as
quickly as possible.
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollu-
tion) may require replacement of the fil-
ter before its scheduled interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume
to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
104
Controls in detail
Climate control
Setting the temperature
Use temperature selectors 5
(컄page 102) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small incre-
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
Increasing
왘Turn the selector 5 slightly upwards.
A red marking will be visible.
Decreasing
왘Turn the selector 5 slightly downwards.
A blue marking will be visible.
Adjusting air volume
Use air volume control switch 9
(컄page 102) to adjust the air volume. The
following symbols are found on the con-
trol:
Adjusting air distribution
Use air distribution control switch 6
(컄page 102) to adjust the air distribution.
The following symbols are found on the
control switch:
i
If you use the standard settings for
heating or cooling the passenger com-
partment (컄page 108), you will rarely
need to change the temperature, air
volume or air distribution.
Symbol Function
0No ventilation
between 0
and Q
Ventilation without a
blower, depending on the
speed driven
between 1
and 5
Ventilation with blower
Symbol Function
cP Directs air to the windows
bDirects air into the pas-
senger compartment
dDirects air to the footwells
aDirects air to the upper
torso
105
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Activating
왘Press button Ð (컄page 102).
The indicator lamp on the Ð button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘Press button Ð (컄page 102).
The indicator lamp on the Ð button
goes out.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫after five minutes if the outside temper-
ature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)
앫after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off
앫after 30 minutes if the outside temper-
ature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C), the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost-
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated af-
ter a maximum of 12 minutes.
Activating
왘Switch on the ignition.
왘Press button F (컄page 102).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
Deactivating
왘Press button F (컄page 102) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Warning! G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
i
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside temper-
tures.
106
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
tioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘Press button ACOFF (컄page 102).
The indicator lamp on the
ACOFF button lights up.
Warning! G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driv-
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts blinking, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operat-
ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
cient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster au-
tomatically turns itself back on.
i
Condensation may drip out from under-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Warning! G
While driving, deactivate the air conditioning
only temporarily to prevent window fogging.
107
Controls in detail
Climate control
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
ing.
왘Press ACOFF again (컄page 102).
The indicator lamp on
the ACOFF button goes out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
Residual heat
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating
왘Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 1 or remove it from the steer-
ing lock.
왘Press button Ð (컄page 102).
The indicator lamp on button Ð
comes on.
Deactivating
왘Press button Ð (컄page 102).
The indicator lamp on button Ð
goes out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫when the ignition is switched on
앫after about 30 minutes
앫if the battery voltage drops
i
How long the system will provide heat-
ing depends on the coolant tempera-
ture and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribu-
tion control setting.
108
Controls in detail
Climate control
Basic settings
Heater
왘Select temperature for each side of the
passenger compartment with tempera-
ture selectors 1.
왘Select air volume with control switch 2,
set at least to position 2 to prevent
window fogging.
왘Set air distribution control switch 3 to
position shown above.
왘Turn side window defroster vents to the
detent position.
왘Open center air vents as desired.
Air conditioning
왘Select temperature for each side of the
passenger compartment with tempera-
ture selectors 1.
왘Select air volume with control switch 2,
set at least to position 1 to start the air
conditioning.
왘Set air distribution control switch 3 to
position a.
왘Open center air vents.
왘Open left and right side air vents.
Special settings
Defrosting
왘Set temperature selectors 1, air vol-
ume control switch 2 and air distribu-
tion control switch 3 to position P.
왘Close center air vents.
왘Open left and right side air vents.
왘Turn side window defroster vents to the
detent position.
i
Use special settings only for a short
duration.
109
Controls in detail
Climate control
Defogging windows
Windows fogged up on inside
왘Press button ACOFF t o switch on the air
conditioning.
The indicator lamp on button ACOFF
goes out.
왘Press button Ð to switch off the air
recirculation.
The indicator lamp on button Ð
goes out.
왘Increase air volume with air volume
control switch 2 .
왘Set air distribution control switch 3 to
position c.
왘Close center air vents.
왘Close left and right side air vents.
왘Turn side window defroster vents to the
detent position.
Windshield fogged up on outside
왘Switch on the windshield wipers
(컄page 44).
왘Set air distribution control switch 3 to
position d or a.
110
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating the climate control
system
Deactivating
왘Set air volume control switch 2 to
position 0.
The fresh air supply to the passenger
compartment is shut off.
Reactivating
왘Set air volume control switch 2 to any
speed.
The fresh air supply to the passenger
compartment is switched on.
Warning! G
While driving, deactivate the climate control
only temporarily to prevent window fogging.
111
Controls in detail
Audio system
Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation
These instructions are intended to help
you become acquainted with your
Mercedes-Benz car radio. They contain
useful tips and a detailed description of the
user functions.
Operating safety
Warning! G
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, system settings should
be entered with the vehicle at standstill and
systems should be operated by the driver
only when traffic conditions permit. Always
pay full attention to traffic conditions first
before operating system controls while driv-
ing.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is cover-
ing a distance of approximately 50 feet (ap-
proximately 14 m) every second.1
1The right to correct errors and make technical
amendments is reserved.
Warning! G
Any alterations made to electronic compo-
nents can cause malfunctions.
The radio, cassette deck, CD changer*, tele-
phone* and voice control system* are inter-
connected. When one of the components is
not operational or has not been
removed/replaced properly, the function of
other components may be impaired.
This conditions might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service
work on electronic components carried out
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
112
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements
113
Controls in detail
Audio system
Item Page
1Radio mode selector 116
2Tuning 116
Fast forward /reverse 120, 123
3CD mode selector* 122
4Display panel 118
5Alpha-numeric keypad
for station storage and
frequency entry
117
CD/Track access* 122, 124
Telephone* 124
Item Page
6Function button 117, 124
7Soft keys for radio band
selection
116
Tone controls 115
Scan tuning 117
Cassette eject 118
Cassette track select 119
Dolby 120
CD random/repeat 123
Item Page
8Tape mode selector 118
9Telephone mode
selector
124
10 Seek tuning 117,
119, 123
11 On/off, volume 115
114
Controls in detail
Audio system
Anti-theft system
If the power supply to the radio has been
interrupted,
CODE
will appear on the display
when it is next switched on. The radio will
only work after the five-digit code has been
entered using the buttons on the
right-hand control panel. The code number is shown on the Radio
Code Card, supplied with the radio.
Entering the code number
왘Switch on the radio.
CODE
will appear on the display.
왘Using the buttons on the alpha-numer-
ic keypad, enter the five digit code.
왘Confirm by pressing the
OK
key.
If an incorrect code has been entered and
confirmed,
CODE
will reappear on the dis-
play. The correct code must be entered
once again.
If an incorrect code is entered three times,
WAIT
will appear on the display and the ra-
dio will be locked out for about ten min-
utes.
!
Never leave the Radio Code Card in the
vehicle. Keep it in a safe place.
i
The lock out time will only count down
if the radio is left switched on.
115
Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric
keypad (right side of radio face) and the
function buttons (left side of radio face)
are referred to as “buttons” and the four
keys under the display are referred to as
“soft keys”.
Operation
Switching on and off
왘Press control knob a.
The radio is switched off when you turn the
key in the steering lock to position 0 or re-
move it from the steering lock. The radio is
switched on again when you turn the key in
the steering lock to position 1 or 2.
Adjusting the volume
왘Turn the control knob.
Turning the knob clockwise will in-
crease the volume, counterclockwise
will decrease the volume.
Audio functions
The
AUD
key is used to select the BASS,
TREBLE and BALANCE functions. Settings
for bass and treble are stored separately
for the cassette and CD modes. Tone level
settings are identified by the vertical bars.
The center (flat) setting is shown by one
longer bar in the center of the display.
Bass
왘Press the
AUD
key repeatedly until
BASS
appears in the display.
Treble
왘Press the
AUD
key repeatedly until
TRE-
BLE
appears in the display.
왘Press the +key to increase or the -key
to decrease the level.
i
Do not press directly on the radio dis-
play face.
i
The radio can also be switched on even
if the key is not inserted in the steering
lock, but will switch itself off automati-
cally after one hour to conserve vehicle
battery power.
116
Controls in detail
Audio system
Balance
왘Press the
AUD
key repeatedly until
BALANCE
appears in the display.
왘Press the
L
key to move the sound to
the left speaker or the
R
key to move
the sound to the right speaker.
Centering all audio functions
왘Push and hold down the
AUD
key.
All audio functions (bass, treble and
balance) are set to center or flat posi-
tions, and the volume is adjusted to a
pre-set level.
Radio mode
Selecting radio mode
왘Press b button.
Selecting the band
왘Press the key located below the de-
sired band.
The band selected is shown in the top
line of the display.
Manual tuning
왘Press either the d or c button.
Step-by-step tuning in ascending or de-
scending order of frequency will take
place.
The first three tuning steps will take place
without muting. The radio will then be mut-
ed and high-speed tuning will take place
until the button is released.
The following tuning intervals will be
shown on the display:
Frequency ranges:
FM 87.9 - 107.9 MHz
AM 530 - 1710 kHz
WB approx. 162 MHz
FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
WB Channels 1-7
117
Controls in detail
Audio system
Seek tuning
왘Press either the f or e button.
The radio will tune to the next receiv-
able station.
Scan tuning
왘Press the
SC
key.
Each station with a strong signal on the
band selected will be tuned in for
8 seconds. The first scan will tune only
the stations with a high signal strength.
The second scan will tune every receiv-
able station.
By pressing either the d, c, f or
e buttons, or the
SC
key, the scan
mode can be cancelled.
Station memory
Ten stations can be stored in the AM and
FM bands via the alpha-numeric keypad.
The “0” button corresponds to location 10.
Weatherband (WB) channels 1 to 7 can be
retrieved via the alpha-numeric keypad
and are preset at the factory.
Storing stations
왘Hold the number button down for ap-
proximately 2 seconds.
The currently displayed frequency is
stored on the selected station button.
The storage procedure is confirmed by
a short signal tone.
Retrieving a station from memory
왘Press the desired station button.
Direct frequency input (AM and FM
only)
왘Select the band.
왘Press the “ button and enter the
desired frequency using the
alpha-numeric keypad.
Frequencies outside of the frequency
ranges (frequencies specified on
page 116) will not be accepted. The
frequency input mode is cancelled if no
button is pressed within 4 seconds.
118
Controls in detail
Audio system
Cassette mode
Playing cassettes
왘Press the “TAPE” button.
왘Press the eject (EJ) key.
The display folds down and the cas-
sette slot becomes visible.
왘Push the cassette into the slot until it
engages.
The cassette will be pulled in automati-
cally.
The radio will switch to cassette mode.
Track 1 will be played and
SIDE 1
dis-
played. Track 1 is the side of the cassette
which is facing upwards. The cassette
deck will automatically detect the type of
tape and switch the equalization automati-
cally. A cassette symbol in the display indi-
cates that a tape is in the mechanism. This
symbol appears in all modes but not in cas-
sette mode.
The cassette will not be ejected when the
radio is switched off or another mode is se-
lected.
If a cassette is in the mechanism, cassette
mode can be selected by using the “TAPE”
button. If no cassette has been inserted,
the display will show
NO TAPE
.
Cassette eject
왘Press the eject (
EJ
) key.
The display will fold down and the
cassette will be ejected.
i
Do not press directly on the radio dis-
play face.
Return the display panel to its normal
position by folding it back up and
pressing gently on the display frame to
lock in place.
When playing mono recorded tapes
(e.g. books) through a stereo system,
the sound from one track might bleed
to the other track, despite setting the
balance to the full left or full right
speakers.
!
If the display is in the down position for
more than 20 seconds, two successive
beeps will be heard. This will continue
at 5 second intervals until the display is
returned to its normal position.
컄컄
119
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘Remove the cassette.
왘Fold the display back up manually.
The radio will switch back to radio
mode automatically.
Track selection
왘Press the track selection (
TRK
) key.
The current track will be displayed as
SIDE 1
or
SIDE 2
. The track will be
changed automatically at the end of
the tape.
Track search forwards/backwards
왘Press the f button.
SEEK FWD
will be shown on the display
and the track search will run the tape
forwards to the start of the next track.
왘Press the e button.
SEEK RWD
will be shown on the display
and the track search will run the tape
backwards to the start of the track cur-
rently playing.
왘Press the same button again to inter-
rupt track search.
i
The cassette will not be ejected when
the radio is switched off.
!
If the display is in the down position for
more than 20 seconds, two successive
beeps will be heard. This will continue
at 5 second intervals until the display is
returned to its normal position.
i
The beginning of a track can only be lo-
cated if there is a break of at least
4 seconds between tracks.
120
Controls in detail
Audio system
Fast forward/reverse
왘Press the d button.
FORWARD
will appear on the display and
fast forward will start.
왘Press the c button.
REWIND
will appear on the display and
fast reverse will start.
왘Press the same button again to stop
fast forward/reverse, or it will stop au-
tomatically at the beginning or the end
of the tape. The track will automatically
change at the end or beginning of the
tape and play will begin.
Scanning
왘Press the
SC
key.
Each track on the cassette will be
played for 8 seconds in ascending or-
der.
Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system)
To enable optimum reproduction of cas-
settes recorded using the Dolby B system,
press the
AUD
key followed by the
NR
key.
NR
is shown in the display in inversed-color
format. To turn off Dolby B noise reduc-
tion, press the
NR
key again. The
NR
in the
display will be shown in the original color
format.
i
The beginning of a track can only be lo-
cated if there is a break of at least
4 seconds between tracks.
Scan will be interrupted if the d,
c, f, e buttons or the
SC
key is pressed.
1Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trade-
marks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpora-
tion. The Dolby noise reduction system is
manufactured under license from Dolby Laborato-
ries Licensing Corporation.
121
Controls in detail
Audio system
CD mode
General notes on CD mode
Should excessively high temperatures oc-
cur while the audio system is in CD mode,
TEMP HIGH
will appear in the display and
muting will take place. The unit will then
switch back to radio mode until the tem-
perature has decreased to a safe operating
level.
Should excessively low temperatures oc-
cur while the audio system is in CD mode,
TEMP LOW
will be displayed, but the CD will
still be played. It will be sensitive to skip-
ping if you are driving over rough roads.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interfer-
ence during playback.
Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs. Do not
write on the CDs or apply any label to the
CDs.
Clean CDs from time to time with a com-
mercially available cleaning cloth. No sol-
vents, anti-static sprays, etc. should be
used.
Replace the CD in its container after use.
Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.
Only use CDs which bear the label shown
and that conform to the compact disc dig-
ital audio standard (IEC 60908).
Use of CDs which do not meet this stan-
dard may cause damage to the CD chang-
er. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an
adapter.
Warning! G
The CD changer* is a Class 1 laser product.
There is a danger of invisible laser radiation
if the cover is opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer*
does not contain any parts which can be ser-
viced by the user. For safety reasons, have
any service work which may be necessary
performed only by qualified personnel.
122
Controls in detail
Audio system
CD changer* installed
1CD
2CD changer
3CD tray
4CD magazine
If a CD changer is installed, it can be oper-
ated from the front control panel of the ra-
dio. A loaded magazine must be installed
for CD playing.
Loading/unloading the CD magazine
왘Slide the changer door to the right.
왘Press the eject button d.
The magazine will be ejected.
왘Remove the magazine.
왘Pull out the CD tray until its stop is
reached.
왘Place the CDs in the recess of the tray,
label side up.
왘Push the tray into the magazine in the
direction shown by the arrow.
왘Insert the loaded magazine into the
changer.
Playing CDs
왘Press the CD button.
The CD most recently played will start
at the point where it was last switched
off. CDs stored in the magazine can be
selected by using the station preset
buttons 1-6.
The magazine slot number of the selected
CD will then be displayed after
CD
. The
number of the track being played will be
displayed after
TRACK
.
If there is no CD in the selected magazine
slot,
NO CD
and the corresponding slot
number will be displayed (e.g.
NO CD3
). Af-
ter the last track on a CD has been played,
the next CD will automatically be selected
and played.
!
Close the door after the magazine has
been inserted.
123
Controls in detail
Audio system
Skipping tracks forwards/backwards
왘Press the f button.
The next track on the CD will be played.
왘Press the e button.
If the track has been playing for more
than 10 seconds, it will revert to the
start of that track. If it has been playing
for less than 10 seconds, it will revert
to the preceding track.
To skip several tracks, the respective
button must be pressed until the de-
sired track is reached. If the beginning
or end of the CD is reached during the
search, the first or last track will be
played.
Fast forward/reverse
왘Press the d button and hold it down
for audible fast forward.
왘Press the c button and hold it down
for audible reverse.
The search will stop when the button is re-
leased. The relative time of the track will
be displayed during the search. The search
mode will cancel if the beginning or end of
the CD is reached.
Scanning
왘Press the
SC
key.
Each track will be played for 8 seconds
in ascending order.
The search will stop at the track in
question if the d, c, f, e
buttons or the
SC
key are pressed.
Random play/repeat function
The tracks of the current CD are played in
random order when the random feature
(
RDM
) is selected.
왘Press the
RDM
key to switch on, and
press
RDM
again to switch off.
When the repeat function (
RPT
) has been
selected, a particular track can be played
for as many times as desired.
왘Press the
RPT
key to switch on.
왘Press
RPT
again to switch off.
i
Both functions cannot be used simulta-
neously.
124
Controls in detail
Audio system
Direct track selection
Tracks can be selected directly using the
buttons on the alpha-numeric keypad.
왘Press the “ function button, fol-
lowed by the track number.
Telephone* operation
Various functions of the Mercedes-Benz in-
tegrated cellular telephone can be per-
formed and displayed via the car radio.
Further instructions for operating the car
telephone can be found in the operation
guide for the cellular telephone*.
Switching the telephone on and off
Switching on:
왘Press the h button,
TEL
appears in
the corner of the display.
Switching off:
왘Press and hold the h button until
the telephone symbol
TEL
no longer ap-
pears in the display,
or
왘Press the “PWR” button on the phone’s
keypad.
Entering telephone number and start-
ing dialing process
왘Enter the desired telephone number
using the alpha-numeric keypad.
The number can have up to 32 digits,
but only 13 of these can be displayed.
왘Press the
SND
button to start the dialing
process.
The entered number can be corrected us-
ing the
CLR
key.
왘Press the
CLR
key briefly.
The last digit will be deleted.
왘Press the
CLR
key longer.
The complete number will be deleted.
Calling up the phone book
The numbers stored in telephone memory
can be called up via either name or number
entries. The memory contents from the
portable phone must be downloaded and
the telephone menu must be selected in
order to call up the phone book. Refer to
the “Memory download” section of the cel-
lular telephone operation guide for more
information.
125
Controls in detail
Audio system
Switching between name search and
number search
왘Press
ABC
key for name search.
왘Press
NUM
key for number search.
Searching and selecting phone book
entries by name
왘Press the
ABC
key.
The current name is shown on the dis-
play.
왘Press the d or c button to se-
lect the stored entries in alphabetical
order.
왘Press the f or e button to se-
lect the stored entries according to al-
phabetical initial letters (e.g. A-Adam,
B-Brown, M-Miller).
Searching and selecting phone book
entries by number
왘Press the
NUM
key.
The current number is shown on the
display.
왘Press the d or c button to se-
lect the stored entries in numerical or-
der.
왘Press the f or e button to se-
lect the stored entries in increments
of 5 (e.g. Entry no. 2, Entry no. 7, etc.).
Placing a call
왘Press the
SND
key when a number or a
name has been selected using the
method described above.
Manual repeat dialing (redial)
왘Press the
SND
key once to re-select the
last entered number.
The last dialed telephone number is
shown on the display.
왘Use the d, c, f or e but-
ton to select the numbers stored in the
re-dial memory of the telephone.
왘Press the
SND
key a second time to
place the call.
The abbreviation
L
and the number in the
memory are shown in the top line of the
display.
126
Controls in detail
Audio system
Accepting an incoming call in tele-
phone mode
With an incoming call, the ringing tone will
be heard and the message
CALL
appears in
the display.
왘Press the
SND
key to answer the call.
Accepting an incoming call in tape, CD
or radio mode
If the telephone is activated in the back-
ground (telephone symbol in the display),
the audio system will automatically switch
to telephone mode when an incoming call
is received. The audio source is muted, the
ringing tone is heard and the message
CALL
appears. After the call has been ter-
minated, the previously selected audio
source is resumed.
Terminating call
왘Press the
END
key to terminate a cur-
rent call.
Component malfunctions
The radio, CD changer* and
Mercedes-Benz integrated cellular tele-
phone* are part of a fiberoptic networked
system. Failure of one of the components
can lead to malfunctions of the other com-
ponents. Please contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes for more informa-
tion in the event of a malfunction.
127
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the side windows
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The power window
switches are on the lower part of the cen-
ter console.
1Power window switch
To operate the power window switch, turn
the key in the steering lock to position 1
or 2.
Opening the windows
왘Press switch k to resistance point.
The window will move downwards until
you release the switch.
Closing the windows
왘Press switch j to resistance point.
The window will move upwards until
you release the switch.
Fully opening the windows
왘Press switch k past the point of
resistance and release.
Warning! G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing procedure can be immediately
halted by releasing the jswitch or by
releasing button ‹ on the remote con-
trol.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from steering lock and lock your vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury. i
The power windows can also be
operated with the retractable hardtop
switch (컄page 131).
128
Controls in detail
Power windows
Stopping windows
왘Briefly press switch k or j.
Synchronizing power windows
The side power windows must be
synchronized
앫after the battery has been disconnect-
ed
앫if the windows cannot be fully opened
or closed
왘Switch ignition on.
왘Press switch j until the window is
completely closed and hold down for
approximately 1 second. Repeat proce-
dure for each window.
129
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Retractable hardtop
Opening and closing the retractable
hardtop
For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop
can only be opened and closed when the
vehicle is standing still.
Warning! G
Before operating the switch for the retract-
able hardtop make sure that no persons are
injured by the moving parts (retractable
hardtop, roof frame, and trunk lid) due to in-
attention.
Hands must never be placed near the roof
frame, upper windshield area, retractable
hardtop, shelf behind roll bars, or trunk lid
while the retractable hardtop is being raised
or lowered. Serious personal injury may oc-
cur.
If potential danger exists, release the re-
tractable hardtop switch. This immediately
interrupts the raising or lowering procedure.
You then can operate the retractable hard-
top switch to raise or lower the retractable
hardtop away from the danger zone.
!
Never sit or place heavy objects on the
rear shelf. Doing so could cause dam-
age to the retractable hardtop and the
rear shelf.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
130
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Luggage cover
The luggage cover is located in the trunk.
1Handle
2Holders
Closing luggage cover
왘Pull out the luggage cover using
handle 1.
왘Hook the luggage cover into left and
right side holders 2.
Opening luggage cover
왘Unhook luggage cover from side
holders 2.
왘While holding onto handle 1, guide lug-
gage cover back into its storage com-
partment.
!
When opening and closing the retract-
able hardtop, make sure that
앫there is sufficient clearance for the
retractable hardtop to move up and
the trunk lid to move back
앫the luggage cover is extended and
closed
앫the trunk lid is closed
앫no roof luggage carrier is installed
앫the outside temperature is above
+5°F (-15°C)
Otherwise the retractable hardtop and
trunk of the vehicle could be damaged.
i
Keep luggage cover in trunk in the open
position to prevent closing the retract-
able hardtop unintentionally while a
roof luggage carrier is installed.
!
To prevent damage to the retractable
hardtop or luggage/cargo when lower-
ing the retractable hardtop
앫load trunk only to the height of the
luggage cover
앫do not permit luggage/cargo to
push up the closed luggage cover
앫do not load anything on top of or in
front of the luggage cover
앫do not place anything on the shelf
behind the roll bars
131
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Opening the retractable hardtop
Retractable hardtop switch
Before pulling on the retractable hardtop
switch, you must ensure that:
앫the parking brake is engaged
(컄page 47)
앫the luggage cover is closed, see lug-
gage cover
앫the trunk lid is closed
앫the ignition is switched on (key in steer-
ing lock position 2)
왘Pull the retractable hardtop switch as
indicated by the arrow until the retract-
able hardtop is completely lowered into
its trunk storage compartment and the
indicator lamp in the retractable hard-
top switch goes out.
If you continuously pull on the retract-
able hardtop switch or release and pull
it again within approximately
30 seconds, the door windows will
close.
However, the door windows can also be
closed/opened later on.
왘Pull on the retractable hardtop switch
twice forward/backward. Pull on the
switch only briefly the first time. The
second time, pull on the switch until
the door windows have reached the de-
sired height.
The rear quarter windows cannot be raised
with the retractable hardtop lowered.
i
For safety reasons, the retractable
hardtop cannot be opened while driv-
ing.
Be sure that the retractable hardtop is
dry before you open it. Otherwise water
may enter the trunk interior.
!
If the indicator lamp in the retractable
hardtop switch blinks slowly, a mal-
function has occurred in the system.
If the indicator lamp in the retractable
hardtop switch blinks rapidly, the trunk
lid and/or luggage cover may be open
and need to be closed.
Warning! G
To prevent possible accidents, drive the ve-
hicle only with the retractable hardtop either
completely closed and locked, or fully low-
ered into its storage compartment.
132
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Prior to cleaning the rear window, read and
observe the instructions in the “Operation”
section (컄page 190).
Closing the retractable hardtop
Retractable hardtop switch
Before pushing on the retractable hardtop
switch, you must ensure that:
앫the parking brake is engaged
(컄page 47)
앫the luggage cover is closed, see lug-
gage cover
앫the trunk lid is closed
앫the ignition is switched on (key in steer-
ing lock position 2)
왘Push the retractable hardtop switch as
indicated by the arrow until the retract-
able hardtop is completely closed and
locked and the indicator lamp in the re-
tractable hardtop switch goes out.
If you continuously push on the retract-
able hardtop switch or release and
push it again within approximately
30 seconds, the door windows will
close.
However, the door windows can also be
closed/opened later on.
왘Pull on the retractable hardtop switch
twice forward/backward. Pull on the
switch only briefly the first time. The
second time, pull on the switch until
the door windows have reached the de-
sired height.
!
Do not manually move corner flaps or
rear shelf. Doing so will result in dam-
age to the retractable hardtop folding
mechanism that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i
For safety reasons, the retractable
hardtop cannot be closed while driving.
133
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Locking the retractable hardtop after
raising/lowering
If the retractable hardtop is not properly
locked, lock it as described below.
Problems when operating the retract-
able hardtop
Unlocked status noticed when stopped
왘Switch on the ignition.
왘To lock the retractable hardtop in its
fully closed position, push the retract-
able hardtop switch forward.
!
If the indicator lamp in the retractable
hardtop switch blinks slowly, a mal-
function has occurred in the system.
If the indicator lamp in the retractable
hardtop switch blinks rapidly, the trunk
lid and/or the luggage cover may be
open, and need to be closed.
Warning! G
To prevent possible accidents, drive the ve-
hicle only with the retractable hardtop either
completely closed and locked, or fully low-
ered into its storage compartment.
Warning! G
The retractable hardtop is not fully closed
and locked:
앫if the indicator lamp in the retractable
hardtop switch remains lit (key in steer-
ing lock position 2).
앫if the indicator lamp blinks, and a warn-
ing sounds for 10 seconds when start-
ing to drive.
134
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Unlocked status noticed while driving
왘Stop the vehicle.
왘Leave the ignition switched on
왘To lock the retractable hardtop in its
fully closed position, push the retract-
able hardtop switch forward.
Wind screen
Installing
1Storage bag
2Pin
3Snap button
4Coat hook
왘Remove wind screen from its storage
bag 1 and unfold.
The storage bag is located on the wall
behind the seat backrests.
왘Attach straps to pins 2.
왘Close snap buttons 3.
왘Pull wind screen on molding over roll
bars.
Warning! G
Stop the vehicle and lock the retractable
hardtop before continuing to drive. You
could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-
ers.
Warning! G
The wind screen can restrict the driver’s
vision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent
a possible accident when visibility is limited
(e. g. in darkness), the upper part of the wind
screen should be folded back.
i
You can hang clothing on coat hooks 4
between the seat backrests.
135
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Removing
왘Pull wind screen on molding back over
roll bars.
왘Open snap buttons 3.
왘Loosen straps from pins 2.
왘Fold wind screen and put it back into
storage bag 1.
i
Pull on snap button head to open the
snap button.
136
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving system of your vehicle is
described on the following pages:
앫Cruise control, with which the vehicle
can maintain a preset speed
The BAS, ABS and ESP driving systems are
described in the “Safety and Security” sec-
tion (컄page 66).
Cruise control
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set any speed
over 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column (컄page 18).
Warning! G
Cruise control is a convenience system de-
signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
eration. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
137
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1Set current or higher speed
2Set current or lower speed
3Cancel cruise control
4Resume at previously set speed
Saving current speed
왘Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
왘Step on the brake pedal.
or
왘Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
i
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
!
Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear se-
lector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
ding (e.g. on icy roads).
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
138
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting stored speed
(“Resume” function)
왘Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 4.
Cruise control will resume the last pre-
viously set speed.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Setting a higher speed
왘Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the de-
sired speed is reached.
왘Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Setting a lower speed
왘Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
왘Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph (1 km/h) in-
crements
Faster
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1.
Slower
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2.
Warning! G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
ous injury to you and others.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will au-
tomatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the vehi-
cle sufficiently.
Vehicles with manual transmission:
The set cruise controlled speed is
switched off when declutching exceeds
4 seconds during downshifting a gear.
139
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces Glove box
1Glove box lid release
2Glove box
Opening the glove box
왘Pull lid release 1.
The glove box lid opens downward.
Closing the glove box
왘Push lid up to close.
Locking the glove box
왘Insert key into the glove box lock and
turn it to position 1. Remove key from
the lock while in position 1.
Unlocking the glove box
왘Turn key in the glove box lock to
position 2. Remove key from the lock
while in position 2.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
than the seat backs. Do not place anything
on shelf behind the roll bars.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob-
jects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
140
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder
1Cup holder
2Release button
Opening cup holder
왘Push release button 2.
The cup holder 1 opens automatically.
Closing cup holder
왘Push cup holder against dashboard
until it engages.
Storage compartments
1Storage compartment in center
console
2Storage compartment in armrest
Opening compartment in center console
왘Slide cover 1 rearward.
The compartment contains a cigarette
lighter (컄page 143).
Closing compartment in center console
왘Slide cover 1 forward.
Warning! G
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
141
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening compartment in armrest
왘Lift lid with handle 2.
Closing compartment in armrest
왘Lower lid until it engages in lock.
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Shelf behind roll bars
i
The storage compartment in the arm-
rest can be locked with the remote con-
trol (컄page 74).
The storage compartment cannot be
locked with the central locking switch
(컄page 79).
There are additional storage pockets
behind the seats and in the door
panels.
Warning! G
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob-
jects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, they could be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants.
Warning! G
The shelf behind the roll bars should not be
used to carry objects. This will prevent such
objects from being thrown around and injur-
ing vehicle occupants during an accident or
sudden maneuver.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob-
jects.
142
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtray
1Cover plate
Opening ashtray
왘Briefly touch cover plate 1.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Removing ashtray insert
왘Secure vehicle from movement by
setting the parking brake. Move the
selector lever to position P (manual
transmission: in first gear).
왘Pull ashtray past detent.
왘Hold left and right side 2 of ashtray
insert and pull up.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘Place the ashtray insert into the
ashtray frame.
왘Push the ashtray insert down until it
engages.
Coin holder
왘Open the ashtray.
왘Pull at the top of cover plate 1 and fold
it under 3.
Warning! G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to se-
cure vehicle from movement. Move gear
selector lever to position P (manual trans-
mission: in first gear). With gear selector le-
ver in position P (manual transmission: in
first gear) turn off the engine.
143
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter
1Cigarette lighter
2Cover
왘Turn key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2 (컄page 29).
왘Slide cover 2 rearward.
왘Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The cigarette lighter will pop out auto-
matically when hot.
Telephone*
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
Warning! G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
Hold the knob only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
i
The cigarette lighter socket can be
used to accommodate electrical acces-
sories up to a maximum 85 W.
Warning! G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
144
Controls in detail
Useful features
See separate operating manual for instruc-
tions on how to use the telephone.
Tele Aid
Warning! G
Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop the vehicle before placing or taking
a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (ap-
proximately 13.5 m) every second.
1Observe all legal requirements.
Warning! G
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
hicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for
safety reasons, the driver should not use the
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before an-
swering or placing a call.
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-
tem may only be performed by com-
pleting the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
SOS button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
SOS button stays on after turning the
key in steering lock to position 2.
If you have any questions regarding ac-
tivation, please call the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
145
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫automatic and manual emergency
앫roadside assistance and
앫information.
The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cel-
lular and GPS coverage is available.
왘To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depend-
ing on the type of response required.
Shortly after the completion of your Tele
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
user ID and password via first call mail. By
visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting
“Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access
to account information, remote door un-
lock and more.
System self-check
Initially, after turning the key in the steer-
ing lock to position 2, malfunctions are de-
tected and indicated (the indicator lamps
in the SOS button, the Roadside Assis-
tance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than
10 seconds or do not come on).
i
The SOS button is located in the over-
head control panel. The Roadside
Assistance button • and the Infor-
mation button ¡ are located below
the center armrest cover.
!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
lites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the Tele
Aid system may not function and if this
occurs, assistance must be summoned
by other means.
Warning! G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or in
the Information button do not come on dur-
ing the system self-check or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated constantly in
red after the system self-check, a malfunc-
tion in the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as ex-
pected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
146
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatical-
ly:
앫following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning detractors
(ETDs) or airbags deploy,
앫if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm sys-
tem (컄page 71) and tow-away alarm
(컄page 72).
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See below for instructions on
initiating an emergency call manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the ve-
hicle (determined by the GPS satellite loca-
tion system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon af-
ter the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes. The Response Center
will attempt to determine more precisely
the nature of the accident provided they
can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.
Warning! G
The Tele Aid control unit is located under the
driver’s seat. If there is accumulation of wa-
ter or other liquid in this area, the Tele Aid
control unit could suffer an electrical short
circuit making the system inoperative. In
this case the indicator lamp in the SOS but-
ton does not illuminate during or remains il-
luminated after the system self-check. Have
the system checked at the nearest Mer-
cedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
147
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫it has been activated and is operation-
al. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
앫the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response cen-
ter.
Initiating an emergency call manually
1Cover
2SOS button
왘Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
왘Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will
flash until the emergency call is con-
cluded.
왘Wait for a voice connection to the Re-
sponse Center.
왘Close cover 1 after the emergency call
is concluded.
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the re-
sponse center.
Warning! G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il-
luminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network is not available).
Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
148
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Roadside Assistance button •.
왘Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress.
The Tele Aid system will transmit data gen-
erating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to avail-
ability of cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘Describe the nature of the need for as-
sistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may ap-
ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance man-
ual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
앫Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This func-
tion permits the Mercedes-Benz Road-
side Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and actu-
al vehicle data.
Warning! G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-
hicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
tion. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they re-
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
pants.
149
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Information button ¡.
왘Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Cen-
ter will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress.
The Tele Aid system will transmit data gen-
erating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to avail-
ability of cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
lished. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
arately) to learn more (USA only).
i
The indicator lamp in the Roadside As-
sistance button • remains illumi-
nated in red for approx. 10 seconds
during the system self-check after turn-
ing the key in the steering lock to
position 2 (together with the
SOS button and the Information
button ¡).
See System self-check (컄page 145)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center es-
tablished, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assis-
tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network was not available).
i
The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approx. 10 seconds during the sys-
tem self-check after turning key in the
steering lock to position 2 (together
with the SOS button and the Roadside
Assistance button •).
See System self-check (컄page 145)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuous-
ly and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not avail-
able).
150
Controls in detail
Useful features
Upgrade signals
The Tele Aid system processes calls using
the following priority.
앫Automatic emergency – First priority
앫Manual emergency – Second priority
앫Roadside assistance – Third priority
앫Information – Fourth priority
Should a higher priority call be initiated
while you are connected, an upgrade (al-
ternating) tone will be heard, and the ap-
propriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identi-
fication number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to re-
transmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmis-
sion is completed. Once a call is conclud-
ed, a beep will be heard and the
appropriate indicator lamp will stop flash-
ing. Audio system operation will resume.
!
If the indicator lamps do not start flash-
ing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
fault or the service is not currently ac-
tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Center and have
the system checked or contact the Re-
sponse Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in
Canada) as soon as possible.
!
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus-
tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
Canada.
151
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
tentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and the
reserve key is not handy:
왘Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your pass-
word which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘Then return to your vehicle and pull
outside trunk handle for minimum of
20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
cle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is conclud-
ed. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Customer Assis-
tance Center representative, except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls.
i
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the audio system is muted and the se-
lected mode (radio, tape or CD) paus-
es. The optional cellular phone (if
installed) switches off. If you must use
this phone, the vehicle must be parked.
Disconnect the coiled cord and place
the call.
i
The remote door unlock feature is avail-
able if the relevant cellular phone net-
work is available.
The SOS button will flash to indicate re-
ceipt of the door unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Re-
sponse Center specialist will attempt
to establish voice contact with the ve-
hicle occupants.
If the trunk handle was pulled for more
than 20 seconds before door unlock
authorization was received by the Re-
sponse Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pulling the trunk
handle again.
152
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen vehicle tracking services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered inci-
dent report.
왘Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is lo-
cated, the Response Center will con-
tact the local law enforcement and you.
The vehicle’s location will only be pro-
vided to law enforcement.
Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
objects.
1Indicator lamp
2Hand-held remote control trans-
mitter
3, 4, 5 Signal transmitter key
Warning! G
When programming a garage door opener,
the door moves up or down.
When programming or operating the remote
control make sure there is no possibility of
anyone being harmed by the moving door.
i
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience diffi-
culties with programming the transmit-
ter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
153
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming or reprogramming the
integrated remote control
왘Turn key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2.
왘Hold the end of the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device you wish to train
approximately 2 to 5 inches (5 cm to
12 cm) away from the surface of the in-
tegrated remote control located on the
inside rear view mirror, keeping the in-
dicator lamp in view.
왘Using both hands, simultaneously push
the hand-held transmitter button and
the desired integrated remote control
button. Do not release the buttons until
completing next step.
왘The indicator lamp on the integrated
remote control will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly. The rapid flashing
lamp indicates successful program-
ming of the new frequency signal.
왘When the indicator lamp flashes rapid-
ly, release both buttons.
왘To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above.
i
For operation in the USA only: This de-
vice complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
If, after several attempts, you do not
successfully program the integrated re-
mote control device to learn the signal
of the hand-held transmitter, the ga-
rage door opener could be equipped
with the “rolling code feature”.
154
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other roll-
ing code devices) with the rolling code fea-
ture, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion of
this text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker and
easier.)
왘Locate training button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
If there is difficulty locating the trans-
mitting button, refer to garage door
opener operator’s manual.
왘Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds time to initiate the
following step.
왘Firmly press and release the pro-
grammed integrated remote control
transmit button.
왘Press and release same button a sec-
ond time to complete the training pro-
cess.
Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
왘Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed button on
the integrated remote control transmit-
ter.
Canadian programming
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop trans-
mitting.
왘Continue to press and hold the inte-
grated remote control transmitter but-
ton (refer to steps two through four in
the “Programming” portion) while you
press and re-press (“cycle”) your
hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds
until the frequency signal has been
learned.
Upon successful training, the indicator
lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly
after several seconds.
155
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operation of remote control
왘Turn key in steering lock to position 1
or 2.
왘Select and press the appropriate but-
ton to activate the remote controlled
device.
The integrated remote control trans-
mitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing the remote control memory
왘Turn key in steering lock to position 1
or 2.
왘Simultaneously hold down the left and
right side buttons for approximately
20 seconds, or until the indicator lamp
blinks rapidly.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
156
157
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
158
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find de-
tailed information on operating, maintain-
ing and caring for your vehicle.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satis-
fied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive en-
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of max-
imum rpm in each gear).
앫Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the selector lever or the gearshift lever.
앫Shift gears in a timely manner.
앫Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫Do not brake the vehicle by shifting to
a lower gear using the selector lever.
앫Select positions 3,2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may grad-
ually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
!
Additional instructions for AMG vehi-
cles:
앫During the first 1000 miles
(1500 km), do not exceed a speed
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫During this period, avoid engine
speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.
All of the above, as may apply to your
vehicle type, also apply when driving
the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the
engine or the rear differential has been
replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
159
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-
pends on driving habits and operating con-
ditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫Keep tires at the recommended infla-
tion pressures.
앫Remove unnecessary loads.
앫Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
eration.
앫Have all maintenance work performed
at regular intervals by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.
Drinking and driving Pedals
Warning! G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving can be a very dangerous combi-
nation. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
cident is sharply increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or
allow anyone to drive after drinking or taking
drugs.
Warning! G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
jects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
160
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Brakes
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only sub-
jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
sionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Warning! G
When the engine is not running, the brake
and steering systems are without power as-
sistance. Under these circumstances, a
much greater effort is necessary to stop or
steer the vehicle.
Warning! G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through wa-
ter deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effec-
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
dent.
!
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄page 68).
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in
the reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system
may be the reason for low brake fluid in
the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center im-
mediately.
161
Operation
Driving instructions
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so that the air stream will cool
down the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the oper-
ating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow one drive wheel to spin for an ex-
tended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Parking
All checks and service work on the
brake system should be carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Install only brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Warning! G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps pre-
vent overheating of the brakes and re-
duces brake pad wear.
!
Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re-
duces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
Warning! G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫Move the selector lever to position P
(manual transmission: first or reverse
gear).
앫Slowly release brake pedal.
앫When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫Turn the key to steering lock position 0.
앫Take the key and lock vehicle when
leaving.
162
Operation
Driving instructions
Tires
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and be-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
mately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Specified tire pressures must be main-
tained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subject to high loads (e.g. high speeds,
heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
!
Set the parking brake whenever park-
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move selector lever to position P (man-
ual transmission: first or reverse gear).
In addition, when parking on hills, turn
front wheel towards the road curb.
Warning! G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
tion to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for re-
pairs.
Warning! G
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
As tread depth approaches 1/16 in
(1.5 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet
road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
163
Operation
Driving instructions
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires for the winter season for all
four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed snow,
they can reduce your stopping distance as
compared with summer tires. Stopping
distance, however, is still considerably
greater than when the road is not covered
with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate cau-
tion.
Tire speed rating
Vehicles without Sport Package
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“V”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 149 mph (240 km /h) and “W”-rated
tires, which have a speed rating of
168 mph (270 km/h).
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning! G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Warning! G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at greater than the maximum
speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure
causing loss of vehicle control and resulting
in an accident and/or personal injury and
possible death, for you and for others.
i
Additional information on winter tires
can be found under “Winter tires”
(컄page 183).
164
Operation
Driving instructions
Vehicles with Sport Package*
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
Despite of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru-
dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
ing conditions.
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move selector lever to position N or de-
clutch in case of manual transmission. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
rective steering action.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal brake effect.
We therefore recommend depressing the
brake pedal periodically when traveling at
length on salt-strewn roads.
This can bring road salt impaired braking
efficiency back to normal. Be very careful
that you carry out these braking maneu-
vers without endangering any other road
users.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-
cy should be tested as soon as possible af-
ter driving is resumed while observing the
safety rules in the previous paragraph.
i
Information on driving with snow
chains (컄page 184).
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control. Warning! G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
terior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
hicle not facing the wind.
165
Operation
Driving instructions
For more information on winter driving
(컄page 183).
Standing water Passenger compartment
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is a widely-spread
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth.
If you must drive through standing wa-
ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such dam-
age is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ly as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects.
166
Operation
Driving instructions
Control and operation of radio trans-
mitter
Radio and telephone*
Telephones and two-way radios
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
structions regarding use of an external an-
tenna.
Catalytic converter
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con-
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis-
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our rec-
ommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet.
Warning! G
Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only op-
erate the radio or telephone1 if road and
traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec-
ond.
1Observe all legal requirements
Warning! G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury. !
To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
verters, use only premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
167
Operation
Driving instructions
Emission control
Certain engine systems serve to keep the
toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible legal limits.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly ac-
cording to factory specifications. Any ad-
justments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-
cians. Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing re-
quirements. For details refer to the Service
Booklet.
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant
temperature may rise to approx. 248°F
(120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-
gine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-
erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Warning! G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
dow fully open at all times.
168
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning! G
앫Driving when your engine is badly over-
heated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine com-
partment, to catch fire. You could be se-
riously burned.
앫Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
169
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
Fuel filler flap
왘Remove the key from the steering lock.
왘Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
왘Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
to it until possible pressure is released.
왘Take off the cap and set it in the recess
on the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
왘Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
왘Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
right.
Warning! G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious inju-
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
i
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
Warning! G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
sure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
zle, which could cause personal injury.
컄컄
170
Operation
At the gas station
You will hear when the fuel cap is tight-
ened.
왘Close the fuel filler flap.
You should hear the latch close shut.
Check regularly and before a long trip
1Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
More information on filling up the res-
ervoir can be found in the “Operation”
section (컄page 179).
2Brake fluid
More information on brake fluid can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄page 271).
3Coolant level
More information on coolant can be
found in the “Operation” section
(컄page 176).
4Engine oil level
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Operation” section
(컄page 172).
Opening hood (컄page 171).
Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (pota-
ble water quality). More information on
coolant can be found in the “Operation”
section (컄page 176).
Exterior lamp switch (컄page 83).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, refer
to page (컄page 221) in the “Practical
hints” section.
Exterior lamp switch (컄page 83).
Tire inflation pressure
More information on tire inflation pressure
can be found in the “Operation” section
(컄page 181).
i
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ? lamp to
illuminate.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 199).
171
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood
Opening
1Hood release
왘Pull hood release 1 downwards.
The hood is unlocked.
2Lever for opening the hood
왘Push lever 2 on the hood upwards.
왘Open the hood (do not pull up on the
lever) and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Warning! G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield. Warning! G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
172
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing
왘Let the hood drop from a height of ap-
proximately 1ft (30cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
왘Check to make sure that the hood is
fully closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫the vehicle is new
앫the vehicle is driven frequently at high-
er engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
앫be parked on level ground
앫be at normal operating temperature
앫have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
Warning! G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
perature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning! G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫with the engine running
앫while starting the engine
앫if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
Warning! G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
173
Operation
Engine compartment
You can check the engine oil level with
the oil dipstick
왘Open the hood (컄page 171).
왘Pull out oil dipstick 1 (컄page 175) and
wipe the tip clean.
왘Reinsert the oil dipstick into the dip-
stick guide tube as far as it will go.
1Oil dipstick
왘Pull out the oil dipstick again after
approximately 3 seconds.
The oil level is acceptable when it
leaves a line between the upper and
lower marks of the dipstick.
For adding oil (컄page 175).
See “Practical hints” (컄page 200) if the
low engine oil level warning lamp in the in-
strument cluster lights up.
You can check the engine oil level on the
odometer display (SLK 320 and
SLK 32 AMG only)
왘Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 2.
1Knob
왘Wait until the symbols : and I
appear in the odometer display indica-
tor.
i
Fill quantity between upper and lower
dipstick marking level is approximately
2.1 US qt (2.0 l).
컄컄
174
Operation
Engine compartment
왘Within 1 second press knob 1 on the
instrument cluster twice.
One of the following messages will sub-
sequently appear in the indicator:
앫
OK
앫
-1.0 Q
(Canada:
-1.0 L
)
앫
-1.5 Q
(Canada:
-1.5 L
)
앫
-2.0 Q
(Canada:
-2.0 L
)
For adding oil (컄page 175).
If there is excessive engine oil with the en-
gine at normal operating temperature, a
signal sounds and the following message
will blink in the odometer display:
HI
왘Have excess oil siphoned.
If the I symbol flashes in the odometer
display field, a proper oil level check can-
not be performed.
왘Wait 5 minutes before repeating check
procedure.
Perform the oil level check with the dip-
stick (컄page 173) if it cannot be complet-
ed via the odometer display field. In this
case we recommend that you that you
have the system checked at a
Mercedes-Benz Center.
See “Practical hints” (컄page 200) if the
low engine oil level warning lamp in the in-
strument cluster lights up.
!
If the message
-2.0 Q
(Canada:
-2.0 L
) blinks and a signal
sounds, add oil according to amount
displayed.
i
If the : and I symbols are con-
tinuously illuminated after pressing the
left knob on the instrument cluster
twice, and if there is no change in the
odometer display field or the low en-
gine oil level warning lamp comes on, a
malfunction has occurred to the sys-
tem.
Perform the engine oil level check with
the dipstick (컄page 173).
If no oil leaks are noted, drive to the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center to have
the system checked.
175
Operation
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil
SLK 230 Kompressor
1Oil dipstick
2Oil filler cap
왘Unscrew oil filler cap 2 from the filler
neck.
Be careful not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when
adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused
by oil entering the ground or water.
왘Screw oil filler cap 2 back onto the filler
neck.
SLK 320, SLK 32 AMG
1Oil dipstick
2Oil filler cap
왘Unscrew oil filler cap 2 from the filler
neck.
Be careful not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when
adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused
by oil entering the ground or water.
왘Screw oil filler cap 2 back onto the filler
neck.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄page 271).
!
Excessive oil must be siphoned or
drained off. It could cause damage to
the engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. !
Excessive oil must be siphoned or
drained off. It could cause damage to
the engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
176
Operation
Engine compartment
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
Coolant
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compart-
ment.
SLK 230 Kompressor
1Coolant expansion tank
2Float in the filler neck
왘Using a rag, turn the cap to the left to
the first detent position. Allow any ex-
cess pressure to escape.
왘Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
The coolant level is correct if float 2
can be seen at the top through the filler
neck.
Warning! G
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
앫Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
앫Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
imately ½ turn to relieve excess pres-
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
der pressure.
앫Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts. 컄컄
177
Operation
Engine compartment
왘Add coolant as required.
왘Turn the cap back, past the first detent
position, as far as it will go.
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” section
(컄page 273).
SLK 320, SLK 32 AMG
1Coolant expansion tank
2Marker in the filler neck
왘Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx-
imately one half turn to the left to re-
lease any excess pressure.
왘Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
앫for cold coolant: the level must
reach marker 2 in the filler neck of
the expansion tank.
앫for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
왘Add coolant as required.
왘Replace and tighten cap.
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” section
(컄page 273).
i
The drain plugs for the cooling system
are located on the right side of the en-
gine block and at the bottom of the ra-
diator.
i
The drain plugs for the cooling system
are located on the right side of the en-
gine block and at the bottom of the ra-
diator.
178
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the en-
gine compartment.
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated ser-
vice life.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short dis-
tance trips, you will need to have the bat-
tery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Observe all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
Risk of explosion
Keep flames or sparks away
from battery. Do not smoke.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
179
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approx. 7.4 US qt (7 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
왘Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed wind-
shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de-
pending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing. Failure to do so could result in
damage to the washer system/reser-
voir.
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (컄page 275).
1Washer fluid reservoir
Warning! G
Washer solvent /antifreeze is highly flam-
mable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, be-
cause it may ignite. You could be seriously
burned.
i
The windshield washer system on this
vehicle is heated, so a fluid mixture pro-
duced for temperatures of
approximately 14°F (-10°C) should be
sufficient.
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer flu-
id can damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
180
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter for information on tested and recom-
mended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation. They can also offer ad-
vice concerning tire service and purchase.
Retread tires are not tested or recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehi-
cle when such tires are used.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter for information on tested and recom-
mended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation.
Important guidelines
앫Use only sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage.
앫If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
pressure and correct as required.
앫Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8in (3 mm).
앫When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Warning! G
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫The wheel brakes or suspension compo-
nents can be damaged.
앫The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guar-
anteed.
Warning! G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
181
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫Driving style
앫Tire pressure
앫Distance driven
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advantag-
es, such as better aquaplaning perfor-
mance. To benefit, however, you must
ensure that the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in-
tended direction of tire rotation.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
Regularly check your tire pressure at inter-
vals of no more than 14 days.
If the tires are warm, you should only cor-
rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur-
rent operating conditions.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec-
ified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
Warning! G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Warning! G
If the tire pressure repeatedly drops:
앫Check the tires for punctures from for-
eign objects.
앫Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
i
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap.
182
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire pressure changes by approximately
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
The tire temperature and with it the tire
pressure is increased also while driving,
depending on the driving speed and the
tire load.
Check the spare tire periodically for condi-
tion and inflation. Spare tires will age and
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.
Rotating wheels
The wheels can be rotated every 3000 to
6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or soon-
er if necessary, according to the degree of
tire wear. The same direction of tire rota-
tion must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteris-
tic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and en-
sure proper tire inflation pressure.
Warning! G
Follow recommended inflation pressure.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
cause they are more likely to become punc-
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat-
ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Warning! G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size.
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
183
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service
includes:
앫Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp*
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for below freezing temperatures
(컄page 275).
앫Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to ensure
that the engine can be started, even at
low ambient temperatures.
앫Tire change. We recommend M+S
rated radial-ply tires on all four wheels
for the winter season.
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 39°F (4°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum ef-
fectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter
operation.
For safe handling, ensure that all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
tices are available from your tire dealer or
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning! G
Winter tires with a tread depth under 0.16 in
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no long-
er suitable for winter operation.
Warning! G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
184
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block
heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
앫Chains should only be used on the rear
wheels. Follow the manufacturer's
mounting instructions.
앫Use only snow chains that are ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.
i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
(컄page 70) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the vehi-
cle’s traction.
!
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with tire size 225 / 45 R17 91 H M+S,
with the collapsible tire, with the tire
size 225 / 50 R16 92 V, with the tire
size 225 / 50 R16 92 W and the tire
size 245 / 40 R17 91 Y (Sport Pack-
age*).
185
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Service Booklet at the times called for
by the FSS (Flexible Service System).
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times/mileage called for by
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
FSS will notify you when your next service
is due.
1Knob
2Display in the speedometer
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, the type of service is indi-
cated in the speedometer display 2:
9Minor service (A)
´Major service (B)
Depending on operating conditions
throughout the year, one of the following
service symbols is also shown:
9 1000 Calculated distance remain-
ing, e. g. service in
1000 miles (km)
š 10 Calculated remaining time in
days, e. g. service in 10 days
Clearing the service indicator
The service indicator is automatically
cleared after 10 seconds when you switch
on the ignition or when reaching the ser-
vice treshold while driving. You can also
clear it yourself.
왘Press knob 1.
i
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
186
Operation
Maintenance
Service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested
service term:
앫the 9 or ´ appears in the
display 2 for 30 seconds and a signal
sounds after switching on the ignition.
앫it is preceeded by a “-” (minus symbol)
The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the
service indicator following a completed
service.
Calling up the service indicator
왘Within 1 second press knob 1
(컄page 185) twice.
The service symbol and the service
deadline appear in the display 2.
Resetting the service indicator
In the event that the service on your vehi-
cle is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
service indicator yourself.
왘Switch ignition on and immediately
press knob 1 (컄page 185) twice with-
in 1 second.
The present status for days or distance
is displayed.
왘Within 10 seconds turn key in steering
lock to position 0.
왘Press and hold knob 1 while turning
key in steering lock to position 2 again.
The present status for days and dis-
tance is displayed once more.
Continue to hold knob 1 until you hear
a signal.
왘Release knob 1.
The service indicator now displays the
reset interval.
i
If the service indicator was inadvertent-
ly reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center
correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing proper service as
called for by the FSS will cause the FSS
to incorrectly determine the next ser-
vice interval which will result in engine
damage not covered by the Mer-
cedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the service indica-
tor. To arrive at the true service dead-
line, you will need to subtract these
days from the days shown in the ser-
vice indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
187
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
In operation, your vehicle is subjected to
varying external influences which, if gone
unchecked, can attack the paintwork as
well as the underbody and cause lasting
damage.
Such damage is caused not only by ex-
treme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫Air pollution
앫Road salt
앫Tar, gravel and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
diately remove:
앫Grease and oil
앫Fuel
앫Coolant
앫Brake fluid
앫Insects
앫Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi-
nates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫Near the ocean
앫In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
앫During winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent the start of corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
ough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
Warning! G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de-
signed for cleaning your vehicle.
188
Operation
Vehicle care
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod-
ucts.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet “Vehicle Care Guide”.
Power washer
When using a power washer for cleaning
the vehicle, always observe manufactur-
er’s operating instructions.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
every 3 to 5 months, depending on climate
and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
cle doors, etc.).
!
Never use a round nozzle to power
wash tires. The intense jet of water can
result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connec-
tors, seals, or other rubber parts.
189
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical compo-
nents and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
rosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning.
Before applying, all control linkage bush-
ings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be pro-
tected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap-
proved Car Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in out-
side mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not for-
get to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
er.
Headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal
lenses
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
190
Operation
Vehicle care
Wiper blades
Clean wiper blade inserts with a clean
cloth and detergent solution.
Window cleaning
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass
surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
Rear window cleaning
The corner flaps of the rear shelf partially
cover the rear window. This prevents the
window from being fully cleaned with the
hardtop closed.
i
For safety reasons, switch off wipers
and remove key from steering lock be-
fore cleaning the wiper blades, other-
wise the wiper motor can suddenly turn
on and cause injury.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
key in the steering lock.
i
For safety reasons, switch off wipers
and remove key from steering lock be-
fore cleaning the windshield, otherwise
the wiper motor can suddenly turn on
and cause injury.
!
Do not manually move corner flaps or
rear shelf. Doing so will result in dam-
age to the roof folding mechanism that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
If a warning sounds and the indicator lamp
in the hardtop switch blinks, immediately
stop cleaning and move back from window
to prevent possible injury.
The hardtop is lowered into its storage com-
partment.
191
Operation
Vehicle care
왘Prior to cleaning the inside of the rear
window, turn key in steering lock to
position 2.
1Rear shelf in vertical position
왘Operate hardtop via the switch
(컄page 129) until rear shelf 1 is in a
vertical position.
The roof will remain in this position for
approximately 7 minutes, sufficient
time for cleaning the inside of the rear
window.
Light alloy wheels
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.
Follow instructions on container.
Instrument cluster
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto a soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
i
The roof will only stay in this position
when the key is in steering lock
position 2.
If you pull on the hardtop switch again,
you can continue to clean the rear win-
dow for another 7 minutes.
i
Use only acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid could lead to corrosion.
192
Operation
Vehicle care
Headliner
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
(80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently dis-
colored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Leather upholstery
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Cloth upholstery
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Warning! G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
193
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
194
Practical hints
What to do if …?
What to do if …?
Lamps in instrument cluster General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
light up during the bulb self-check when
turning the key in steering lock to
position 2, have it checked and replaced if
necessary.
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
vThe yellow ESP warning lamp
flashes while driving.
The ESP or traction control has come into op-
eration because of detected traction loss in
at least one tire.
왘When driving off apply as little throttle
as possible.
왘While driving, ease up on the acceler-
ator.
왘Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
왘Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: (컄page 70)
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accidents.
¿The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction
indicator lamp comes on while
driving.
The ESP has detected a malfunction and
switched off. Risk of accident! Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions.
왘Turn the ESP back on (컄page 70).
If the ESP cannot be turned back on, have
the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possi-
ble.
195
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
¿The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction
indicator lamp comes on while
driving.
The ESP is deactivated because of an inter-
rupted power supply. The ABS may still be
operational.
왘With vehicle stationary and the engine
running, turn the steering wheel com-
pletely to the left and then to the right
to synchronize the ESP.
The BAS has detected a malfunction and
switched off. The brake system is still func-
tioning normally but without the BAS avail-
able.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the BAS has switched off.
왘When the voltage is above this value
again, the BAS is operational again.
왘If necessary, have the alternator and
battery checked.
196
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
-The yellow ABS malfunction indi-
cator lamp and warning comes
on while driving.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has
switched off. The BAS and ESP are also
switched off. Both indicator lamps come on
with the engine running.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the ABS available.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels will lock during hard braking
reducing steering capability.
왘Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS has switched off.
왘When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
왘If necessary, have the alternator and
battery checked.
197
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
1The red SRS indicator lamp lights
up while driving.
There is a malfunction in the restraint sys-
tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
왘Drive with added caution to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked. Otherwise the SRS
may not be activated when needed in an ac-
cident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
198
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
3(Canada only)
;(except Canada)
The red brake warning lamp
lights up while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘Release the parking brake
(컄page 42).
3(Canada only)
;(except Canada)
The red brake warning lamp
lights up while driving.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-
voir.
왘Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
Warning! G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
brake fluid before checking the brake sys-
tem.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re-
sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
199
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
?The yellow “CHECK ENGINE”
malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
There is a malfunction in:
앫The fuel management system
앫The ignition system
앫The emission control system
앫Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.
왘Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys-
tem. It allows the accurate identifica-
tion of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the passenger
compartment near the engine hood
release.
The fuel cap is not closed tight. 왘Check the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty. 왘After refuelling, start the engine three
or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
<The red seat belt warning lamp
blinks for a brief period after
starting the engine.
The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat
belts.
왘Fasten your seat belt.
200
Practical hints
What to do if …?
When the low engine oil level warning lamp
does not go out after starting the engine,
or comes on while the engine is running
and at operating temperature, the engine
oil level has dropped to approximately the
minimum mark on the dipstick.
When this occurs, the warning lamp will
first come on intermittently and then stay
on if the oil level drops further.
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive
to the nearest service station where the
engine oil should be topped to the “full”
mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
_The red telescoping steering
column* warning lamp remains
lit after starting the engine.
The adjustable steering column is not locked
properly.
왘Lock the steering column
(컄page 34).
WThe yellow low windshield and
headlamp* washer system fluid
level warning lamp remains lit af-
ter starting the engine or lights
up while driving.
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of
total reservoir capacity.
왘Add washer fluid (컄page 179).
NThe yellow low engine oil level
warning lamp remains lit after
starting the engine or lights up
while driving.
The engine oil level is too low. 왘Check the engine oil level
(컄page 172) and add oil as required
(컄page 175).
왘If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
!
The low engine oil level warning light
should not be ignored. Extended driv-
ing with the light illuminated could re-
sult in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
201
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
The fuel reserve and fuel cap placement
warning lamp:
앫lights up while driving The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
왘Refuel at the next gas station
(컄page 169).
앫blinks The fuel cap is not closed tight. 왘Check the fuel cap.
A fuel system leak has been detected. 왘Have the fuel system checked as soon
as possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
BThe yellow low engine coolant
level warning lamp remains lit af-
ter starting the engine or lights
up while driving.
The coolant level is too low. 왘Add coolant (컄page 176).
왘If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning light. Extended driving
with the light illuminated may cause
serious engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat, causing major
engine damage.
202
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
#The red charge indicator lamp
lights up while the engine is
running.
The battery was charged with a battery
charger or jump started.
왘Have the battery checked at a service
station.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
앫alternator malfunctioning
앫one of the two poly-V-belts is broken
왘Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belts.
If one is broken:
왘Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
operative water pump which may re-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘Drive immediately to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
2The yellow brake pad wear indi-
cator lamp lights up while brak-
ing.
The brake pads have reached their wear limit. 왘Have the brake pads replaced as soon
as possible.
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technican
at the intervals specified in the Service
booklet.
203
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
. The yellow exterior lamp failure
indicator lamp lights up while
applying the brake and stays on
until the engine is turned off.
One of the brake lights is malfunctioning. 왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
. The yellow exterior lamp failure
indicator lamp remains lit after
starting the engine or lights up
while driving.
One of the following lights is malfunctioning:
앫parking lamp
앫tail lamp
앫stop lamp
앫low beam head lamp
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄page 221).
i
Additional lighting equipment, if not
properly installed (e.g. auxiliary head-
lamps etc.), could cause the failure in-
dicator monitoring unit to malfunction.
We therefore recommend that an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center install
such equipment for you.
i
If an exterior lamp fails, the indicator
lamp will come on only when that lamp
is switched on.
204
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Additional indicators in the
speedometer display
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
9Perform minor service (A) (컄page 185). 왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to perform service.
´Perform major service (B) (컄page 185). 왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to perform service.
91000 Perform service (A) or (B) after calculated
distance remaining in miles (km)
(컄page 185).
For example: Service in 1000 miles (km).
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to perform service.
š10 Perform service (A) or (B) after calculated
remaining time in days (컄page 185).
For example: Service in 10 days.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to perform service.
Á
îThe
Start
message lights up in
addition to the
Error
message.
The immobilizer is not operational. 왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA),
or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
205
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Lamp in center console
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
7The indicator lamp lights up. A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the
passenger seat. Therefore the front passen-
ger airbag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there is
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
passenger seat.
왘Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
7The indicator lamp does not light
up when a BabySmartTM child
seat is properly installed on the
front passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning. 왘Make sure that there is nothing be-
tween seat cushion and child seat and
check installation of the child seat.
왘If the light remains out, have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the passen-
ger seat until the system has been
repaired.
206
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is located on the left side of
the trunk.
1First aid kit
왘Loosen the fastening strap.
왘Remove first aid kit 1.
Vehicle tool kit
The following is included:
앫Vehicle tool kit
앫Towing eye bolt
앫Wheel wrench
앫Alignment bolt
앫Vehicle jack
앫Wheel bolts
앫Special fuse puller
The jack is exclusively designed for lifting
the vehicle during a wheel change. Always
lower the vehicle on sufficient capacity
jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into ei-
ther side of the vehicle. To help avoid per-
sonal injury, use the jack only to lift the
vehicle during a wheel change. Never get
beneath the vehicle while it is supported by
the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the
area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly
set parking brake and block wheels before
raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is
fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower
the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jack-
stands before working under the vehicle.
207
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Vehicles with a spare wheel
(SLK 230 Kompressor, SLK 320)
1Spare wheel with collapsible tire
2Vehicle tool kit
3Wheel wrench
4Jack
5Electric air pump, bolts for spare wheel
rim
Sparewheel, vehicle tool kit, wheel
wrench, jack and electric air pump are
located under the trunk floor cover.
왘Lift trunk floor cover.
You can take out vehicle tool kit 2,
wheel wrench 3 and jack 4.
Electric air pump 5 is secured with a belt.
왘Loosen the belt.
왘Remove electric air pump from pump
holder.
Spare wheel 1 is secured with the pump
holder.
왘Turn pump holder counterclockwise.
왘Remove pump holder.
왘Remove spare wheel out of the wheel
well.
Spare wheel bolts
Wheel bolts
1 Wheel bolt for
앫wheel rim size 7Jx16 H2 and 8Jx16 H2
앫AMG wheel rim size 71⁄2Jx17 H2 and
81⁄2Jx17 H2
앫spare wheel rim size 41⁄2Bx16 H2
2 Wheel bolt for
앫spare wheel rim size 41⁄2Bx15 H2
(located with electric air pump)
208
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (컄page 265).
Vehicles with TIREFIT kit (SLK 32 AMG)
1Electric air pump
2TIREFIT kit
3Vehicle tool kit, jack, wheel wrench
The electric air pump and TIREFIT kit are
located in the storage box under the trunk
floor cover.
The vehicle tool kit, jack and wheel wrench
are located below the rug on the right side.
왘Lift trunk floor cover.
왘Open storage box cover.
You can take out vehicle tool kit 3 and
accessories.
왘Pull down the flap on the storage box.
왘Remove electric air pump 1 and
TIREFIT kit 2.
!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting spare wheel rim size
41⁄2Bx15 H2.
The use of any wheel bolts other than
wheel bolts 2 for spare wheel rim size
41⁄2Bx15 H2 can cause physical dam-
age to the vehicle.
Warning! G
Be sure to use original length wheel bolts
when remounting the original wheel after it
has been repaired.
209
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Vehicles with TIREFIT kit (SLK 32 AMG)
and CD changer* in trunk
1Storage box cover
2CD changer*
The vehicle tool kit, jack and wheel wrench
are located underneath the CD changer 2.
왘Lift trunk floor cover.
왘Open storage box cover 1.
3Latch
왘Slide latch 3 forward to disengage stor-
age box.
왘Remove storage box.
4Carpet cover
왘Slide small carpet cover 4 from under-
neath the CD changer* 2 and flip back-
wards for easier access to tool kit, jack
and wrench.
왘Slide out tool kit and jack in the direc-
tion of arrow. The wheel wrench is lo-
cated behind the tool kit and jack.
210
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the driver’s door
If you are unable to unlock the driver’s
door with the remote control, open the
door using the key as follows:
1Unlocking
2Locking
3Protective cap
왘Remove protective cap 3 from driver’s
door lock.
왘Unlock the door with the key. To do so,
push key into the lock until it stops and
turn it to the left 1.
Unlocking the trunk
If you are unable to unlock the trunk with
the remote control, open the trunk using
the key as follows:
1Unlocked
2Neutral position
3Locked
왘Insert the key into the trunk lid lock
until it stops.
왘Turn the key counterclockwise to
position 1.
왘Pull handle and lift the trunk lid
(컄page 77).
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the key will
trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To
cancel the alarm, do one of the follow-
ing:
앫Press button Œ or ‹ on the
remote control.
앫Insert the key in the steering lock
and turn it to position 1.
i
Using the key does not operate the
central locking system.
211
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Locking the vehicle
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the remote control, lock it with the key as
follows:
왘Close the passenger door and the
trunk.
왘Press the central locking switch in the
upper center console (컄page 79).
왘Check to see whether the locking knob
on the passenger door is still visible. If
necessary, push it down manually.
왘Lock the driver’s door with the key. To
do so, push key into the lock until it
stops and turn it to the right 2
(컄page 210).
왘Lock the trunk, if necessary with the
key. To do so, push key into the trunk
lid lock until it stops.
Turn the key clockwise to position 3
(컄page 210).
!
Do not place the key inside the trunk,
since the trunk is locked once its lid is
closed and the vehicle was previously
centrally locked.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the key will
trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To
cancel the alarm, do one of the follow-
ing:
앫Press button Œ or ‹ on the
remote control.
앫Insert the key in the steering lock
and turn it to position 1.
i
Using the key does not operate the
central locking system.
212
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Changing batteries in remote control
If the batteries in the remote control are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
1Release button for key
2Battery cover
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘Press release button 1 on the remote
control.
The key folds out.
왘Pull off battery cover 2 in direction of
arrow.
왘Remove the batteries.
왘Insert new batteries with the plus (+)
side facing up.
왘Press battery cover onto housing until
it engages.
Warning! G
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
i
When changing batteries, always re-
place both batteries.
When changing batteries, make sure
that new batteries are clean and free of
lint.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
Afterwards, test the remote control to
see if it is functioning properly. If you
still cannot lock or unlock the vehicle,
synchronize the remote control
(컄page 213).
213
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Synchronizing remote control
If you are unable to lock or unlock the ve-
hicle with the remote control, the remote
control may have to be re synchronized.
왘Aim transmitter eye at vehicle and
briefly press transmit button Œ
or ‹ twice.
왘Within approximately 30 seconds
insert key in steering lock and turn it to
position 2 (컄page 29).
The remote control should once again be
operational.
If the remote control is still malfunctioning,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Fuel filler flap
In case the central locking system does
not release the fuel filler flap, you can open
it manually.
왘Open the trunk.
1Release knob
2Cover
왘Open cover 2 in the right side trunk
panel.
The cover is located behind the trunk
lid hinge.
왘Pull the release knob 1 in direction of
arrow.
The fuel filler flap is opened simulta-
neously.
214
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Manually unlocking the transmission
selector lever
In the case of power failure, the transmis-
sion selector lever can be manually un-
locked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
1Pin
왘Insert a pin 1, e.g. ball point pen, into
the covered opening below position D
of the shift pattern.
왘Perform the following two steps simul-
taneously:
왘Push pin 1 down.
왘Move selector lever from
position P.
왘Remove pin 1.
i
After removing the pin from the open-
ing, the cover will not close fully. Only
after moving the selector lever to
positions D+ and D- does the cover re-
turn to its closed position.
The selector lever is locked again when
moving it to position P.
215
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Raising retractable hardtop manually
If the retractable hardtop cannot be closed
automatically, make certain that all points
listed under the “Retractable hardtop” sec-
tion (컄page 129) were observed.
If the automatic operation still does not
function properly, you can close the re-
tractable hardtop manually.
This procedure should be performed with
great care by two persons.
왘Open doors or lower windows
(컄page 127).
왘Set parking brake (컄page 47).
왘Remove key from steering lock
(컄page 29).
왘Open trunk lid (컄page 77).
왘Open the right side trim panel in the
trunk.
1Screw of hydraulic pump
2Control cable, right
3Hex-socket wrench
왘Remove hex-socket wrench 3 from
cover.
왘Using wrench 3 turn screw 1 of the
hydraulic pump counterclockwise as
far as it will go.
!
Manually closing the retractable hard-
top is a complicated and technically de-
manding procedure. Close the
retractable hardtop manually in emer-
gency cases only. Otherwise, visit an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
앫It is important that a second person
helps you. Otherwise, you could become
trapped or injured.
앫Remove any wristwatches or jewelry
such as rings or bracelets. Otherwise,
they could get caught in the vehicle
mechanism, causing personal injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle.
앫Always use the grips provided. Other-
wise you could injure yourself.
컄컄
216
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왘Keep wrench with you for later use in
closing and locking the retractable
hardtop.
왘Pull the loop of right control cable 2 out
of the opening.
왘Remove first aid kit (컄page 206).
왘Open the left side trim panel in the
trunk.
4Control cable, left
왘Pull the loop of left control cable 4 out
of the opening.
!
If you don’t turn screw 1 of the hydrau-
lic pump to the left point of resistance,
the hydraulic pump could be damaged
by using the retractable hardtop
switch.
i
If you cannot find the control cable,
carefully insert a finger into the open-
ing to feel for the cable.
Warning! G
At this point, the procedure needs to be
done by two people. Otherwise you could be
injured.
217
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
2Control cable, right
4Control cable, left
5Hinge
왘Complete the following steps simulta-
neously:
First person:
왘Pull on control cables 2 and 4 at
the same time.
With the control cables, you release
the catch of the trunk lid.
Second person:
왘Push the trunk lid and hinge 5 to
the rear.
The trunk lid tilts backward.
6Striker eye
왘Carefully fold down trunk lid in the di-
rection of arrow A.
The trunk lid lock engages audibly in
striker eye 6.
왘Pull the trunk lid as far as it will go in
the direction of arrow B.컄컄
Warning! G
While doing this, move backwards carefully.
Otherwise, you could injure yourself on the
trunk lid lock.
218
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
7Bottom half of retractable hardtop
왘Have each person stand on either side
of the trunk.
왘At the same time, reach from each side
of the trunk underneath the bottom
half of retractable hardtop 7.
왘In a smooth motion, pull up on the re-
tractable hardtop in the direction of the
arrow until the bottom half of the re-
tractable hardtop is standing vertically.
8Pins for the retractable hardtop locking
mechanism
9Holes for the pins
왘Complete the next steps simultaneous-
ly. Have one person stand on each side
of the vehicle.
왘Move the retractable hardtop with
one hand in the direction of the ar-
row.
왘With the other hand, guide pins 8
belonging to the retractable hard-
top locking mechanism into corre-
sponding holes 9 located in the
upper edges of the windshield.
Warning! G
Do not place your hands near the upper
windshield area, trunk lid, or between roof
panels while the retractable hardtop is being
raised and locked. Serious personal injury
may occur.
컄컄
Warning! G
Do not place your hands in areas marked X.
Serious personal injury may occur.
219
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
3Hex-socket wrench
10 Protective cap
11 Screw for the retractable hardtop lock-
ing mechanism
왘Take off protective cap 10 on the inner
side of the retractable hardtop.
왘Turn the retractable hardtop’s locking
mechanism screw 11 with hex-socket
wrench 3 clockwise as far as it will go.
The screw will be difficult to turn.
The clasp will open and the retractable
hardtop will engage audibly.
왘Turn the retractable hardtop’s locking
mechanism screw 11 with hex-socket
wrench 3 counterclockwise as far as it
will go.
The retractable hardtop will be locked.
왘Put protective cap 10 back into the
opening and press down on it firmly.
왘Place flat hands near edges (arrows)
and close trunk lid.
220
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Have the retractable hardtop operation
checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possi-
ble.
i
After you have closed the retractable
hardtop manually, you can no longer
앫lock the trunk lid
앫close the rear quarter windows
The trunk lid will also no longer seal
properly.
221
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment (컄page 226).
Bulbs Front lamps
Lamp Type
1Additional turn
signal lamps
LED
2Low beam H7 (55 W)
Xenon*
D2R-35 W
3Parking, standing
and turn signal lamp
2375 NA
4High beam H7 (55 W)
5Fog lamp HB4 (55 W)
6Side marker lamp W5W
222
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement 앫Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Have the LEDs and bulbs for the follow-
ing lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫Additional turn signals in the
exterior rear view mirrors
앫High mounted brake lamp
앫Xenon* lamps
앫Front fog lamps
Lamp Type
7Brake lamp 1154/32 cp
8High mounted brake
lamp
LED
9Backup lamp 1154/32 cp
10 Turn signal lamp 1156 NA
11 Tail, parking, stand-
ing and side marker
lamp
67/4 cp
12 License plate lamps C5W
13 Rear fog lamp,
driver’s side
1155/32 cp
Warning! G
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot.
Allow the lamp to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas.
A bulb can explode if you:
앫touch or move it when hot
앫drop the bulb
앫scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
223
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Low and high beam headlamps (Halo-
gen headlamps only)
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Open the hood (컄page 171).
1Headlamp cover with locking tab
왘Push down locking tab at top and end
of headlamp cover 1 and remove.
2Electrical connector for low beam
headlamp bulb
3Electrical connector for high beam
headlamp bulb
왘Pull off electrical connector 2 or 3.
왘Unhook clamping ring and pull out the
bulb together with clamping ring.
왘Remove bulb.
왘Insert new bulb so that bulb sits prop-
erly in cutouts of bulb socket.
왘Mount clamping ring and reinstall.
왘Plug electrical connector onto the bulb.
왘Reinstall headlamp cover 1.
Low and high beam headlamps (Xenon*
headlamps only)
Warning! G
Do not remove the cover for the xenon head-
lamp. Because of high voltage in xenon
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
repair the lamp and its components. We rec-
ommend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
224
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking, standing and turn signal lamp
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Open the hood (컄page 171).
1Release opening
왘Insert the screwdriver from the vehicle
tool kit into release opening 1.
왘Press the top of the screwdriver toward
the middle of the vehicle and toward
the rear.
The turn signal lamp will be lifted out.
왘Pull the turn signal lamp slightly out of
its mounting.
왘Pull off the electrical connector from
the turn signal lamp.
You can now take the turn signal lamp
completely out of its mounting.
왘Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘Gently push bulb into socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
왘Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
왘Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
clockwise.
왘Plug electrical connector back into the
turn signal lamp.
2Guides
3Tabs
왘Slide the turn signal lamp with tabs 3
into guides 2 and press it toward the
rear into the mounting until it engages.
컄컄
225
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Side marker lamp bulb
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Carefully slide lamp towards front.
왘Remove rear end first.
왘Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘Gently push bulb into socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
왘Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
왘Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
clockwise.
왘To reinstall lamp, set rear end in
bumper and let front end snap into
place.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies
1Brake lamp
2Turn signal lamp
3Tail, parking and standing lamp, side
marker
4Backup lamp
5Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Open trunk lid (컄page 77).
왘Remove cover in right side panel.
왘Remove first aid kit (컄page 206).
Remove cover in left side panel.
왘Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull out.
왘Gently push bulb into socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
왘Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn clockwise.
왘Reinstall bulb socket, push in and turn
clockwise.
왘Close cover.
226
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamp
1Screws
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Loosen both screws 1 and remove
lamp.
왘Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
lamp.
왘Retighten the screws.
Adjusting headlamp aim
(Halogen headlamps only)
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have the adjustment checked
regularly by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
To check and readjust a headlamp, follow
the steps described:
왘Park vehicle on level surface.
왘Open hood (컄page 171).
Vertical headlamp aim
1Headlamp vertical adjusting screw
2Level
i
Low beam adjustments simultaneously
aim the high beam.
Vehicle should have a normal trunk
load.
Vertical aim adjustments change hori-
zontal aim.
227
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘Turn adjusting screw 1 (counterclock-
wise to adjust headlamp downward,
clockwise upward) until bubble in
level 2 is centered on the “0” mark.
Graduations: 0.18° pitch
Horizontal headlamp aim
3Headlamp horizontal adjusting screw
4Sight glass
왘Turn adjusting screw 3 (counterclock-
wise to adjust headlamp to the left,
clockwise to the right) until indicator 4
in the sight glass is in line with the
“0” mark.
228
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Replacing wiper blades
Removing
왘Fold the wiper arm forward.
왘Press safety tab down 1.
왘Push wiper blade downward 2 and re-
move.
Replacing wiper blade insert
왘Place wiper blade on firm support.
왘Press down both tabs.
왘Slide (in direction of arrow) the wiper
blade insert out of the retainer claws.
왘Slide (in direction of arrow) the new
wiper blade insert into retainer claws
until tabs are engaged.
Installing
왘Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until
it locks in place.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, remove key from steer-
ing lock before replacing a wiper blade, oth-
erwise the motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
!
Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
229
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a TIREFIT kit
(SLK 32 AMG only) (컄page 208) or a
spare wheel with collapsible tire
(SLK 230 Kompressor and SLK 320 only)
(컄page 207).
You can identify which TIREFIT kit
(SLK 32 AMG only) you have as follows:
앫The TIREFIT container of kit 1 is a
squeeze container.
앫The TIREFIT container of kit 2 is a rigid
container and includes a flange for filler
hose (outlet) and air hose (inlet).
Preparing the vehicle
왘Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.
왘Turn on hazard warning flashers.
왘Engage the steering wheel lock in the
straight ahead position and set the
parking brake.
왘Move the selector lever to P (manual
transmission to first or reverse gear.
왘Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Sealing tires with TIREFIT kit 1
Small tire punctures, only those in the
tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.
TIREFIT can be used in ambient tempera-
tures down to -4°F (-20°C).
The TIREFIT kit stored in the trunk
(컄page 208) contains the TIREFIT
container, a filler hose, a valve stem tool,
a valve core and a sticker.
왘Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire.
왘Attach the sticker where it will be easily
seen by the driver on the instrument
cluster.
Warning! G
Keep TIREFIT away from sparks, open flame
or heat source.
Do not smoke.
Warning! G
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
cannot be used for:
앫cuts or punctures larger than approx.
0.16 in (4 mm)
앫on a flat tire, or a damaged wheel
앫tire damage caused by driving with ex-
tremely low tire pressure
Do not drive the vehicle under such circum-
stances.
Contact your nearest Mercedes-Benz
Center for assistance or call Roadside Assis-
tance.
230
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing TIREFIT
왘Take the TIREFIT kit out of the trunk
(컄page 208).
1Filler hose
2TIREFIT container
왘Shake contents of TIREFIT container 2.
왘Screw hose 1 on to TIREFIT
container 2.
TIREFIT is now ready for use.
Warning! G
Take care not to allow the contents of
TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or
clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swal-
lowed or absorbed through the skin. It caus-
es skin, eye and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
change clothing as soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.
Warning! G
Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.
231
Practical hints
Flat tire
Adding TIREFIT
1Valve stem
2Valve stem tool
3TIREFIT container
4Filler hose
5Filler hose plug
6Tire valve core
왘Unscrew the valve cap from valve 1.
왘Remove tire valve core 6 from valve
stem 1 using valve stem tool 2. Keep
tire valve core 6 clean and dry.
왘Remove plug 5 from end of hose 4.
왘Push hose 4 onto valve stem 1.
왘Hold TIREFIT container 3 upside down
(hose down) and squeeze firmly several
times until entire contents of the con-
tainer are in tire.
왘Pull hose 4 off and screw tire valve
core 6 tightly into the valve stem 1
using valve stem tool 2.
왘Reinstall valve cap on valve stem 1.
왘Install plug 5 onto end of hose 4.
왘Drive the vehicle back and forth very
slowly approximately 30 ft (10 m).
This distributes the TIREFIT sealant
material inside the tire.
왘Take the electric air pump out of the
trunk (컄page 208).
i
If the removed tire valve core is dirty,
use the spare tire valve core stored
with the valve stem tool.
i
If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
can then peel it off.
232
Practical hints
Flat tire
Inflating the tire
1Flap
2Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
3Union nut
4Electrical plug
왘Open flap 1 on air pump.
왘Pull out electrical plug 4 and air hose
with pressure gauge 2.
왘Screw union nut 3 with air hose 2 on to
the tire valve.
왘Insert electrical plug 4 into vehicle
cigarette lighter socket.
왘Turn key in steering lock to position 1
(컄page 29).
왘Press I on the electric air pump switch.
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the tire.
After 5 minutes, the pressure gauge must
display at least 26 psi (1.8 bar). The air
hose and the union nut can become hot
during inflation. Please exercise appropri-
ate caution.
왘If this tire pressure is not attained, turn
off the electric air pump, detach the air
hose from the tire valve, and again
drive vehicle back and forth very slowly
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
This serves to better distribute the
TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire.
왘Inflate the tire again.
왘Press 0 on the electric air pump
switch.
왘Turn key in steering lock to position 0.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.
Warning! G
Observe safety instructions on air pump la-
bel. !
Do not exceed the maximum pressure
of 36 psi (2.5 bar).
!
Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than eight minutes without in-
terruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again af-
ter it has cooled off.
컄컄
233
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Detach the electric air pump.
왘Reinstall tire valve cap.
왘Store the electrical plug and the air
hose behind the flap and place the air
pump back into the trunk.
왘Close the trunk lid.
왘Drive away immediately.
The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself
evenly inside the tire.
왘After driving vehicle for an initial
10 minutes, check tire pressure using
the pressure gauge on the air pump.
Warning! G
If a tire pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not at-
tained, tire is too severely damaged for
TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire repair
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal
the tire.
Do not drive the vehicle.
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Warning! G
To prevent possible injury when unscrewing
air pump filler hose from tire valve after in-
flating the tire, use a rag since the tire valve
could be hot.
Warning! G
Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed
to operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the instru-
ment cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics may
change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
Warning! G
If tire pressure has fallen below
20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the
vehicle.
Park your vehicle safely away from the road-
way and contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside Assis-
tance.
If tire pressure is at least 20 psi (1.3 bar), in-
flate tire to correct pressure (see label on
fuel filler flap), and drive vehicle to nearest
tire repair facility to have tire repaired or re-
placed.
Recommended duration of use: 300 miles
(500km) at 50 mph (80km /h) with the
recommended tire pressure.
컄컄
234
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible to obtain a
new TIREFIT kit.
왘Bring used TIREFIT materials to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
proper disposal.
왘Replace your TIREFIT container every
four years. Containers are available at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
Sealing tires with TIREFIT kit 2
Small tire punctures, only those in the
tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.
TIREFIT can be used in ambient tempera-
tures down to -4°F (-20°C).
Warning! G
Follow recommend tire pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
cause they are more likely to become punc-
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat-
ed by the label on the driver’s door latch
post). Overloading the tires can overheat
them, possibly causing a blowout.
Warning! G
Keep TIREFIT away from sparks, open flame
or heat source.
Do not smoke.
Warning! G
Take care not to allow the contents of
TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or
clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swal-
lowed or absorbed through the skin. It caus-
es skin, eye and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
change clothing as soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.
Warning! G
Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.
235
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Take the TIREFIT kit out of the trunk
(컄page 208).
왘Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire.
왘Attach the sticker where it will be easily
seen by the driver on the instrument
cluster.
Preparing TIREFIT
1TIREFIT container
2Flap
3Notch
4Electrical plug
5Air hose
6Flange
왘Open flap 2 on the electric air pump.
왘Pull plug 4 and air hose 5 out of the
pump housing.
왘Screw the air pump’s air hose 5 onto
flange 6 of the TIREFIT container.
왘Stick TIREFIT container 1 upside down
into notch 3 of the electric air pump.
7Tire valve
8Electric air pump switch
9Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
10 Filler hose
Warning! G
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
cannot be used for:
앫cuts or punctures larger than approx.
0.16 in (4 mm)
앫on a flat tire, or a damaged wheel
앫tire damage caused by driving with ex-
tremely low tire pressure
Do not drive the vehicle under such circum-
stances.
Contact your nearest Mercedes-Benz
Center for assistance or call Roadside Assis-
tance.
Warning! G
Observe safety instructions on air pump la-
bel.
i
If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
can then peel it off.
236
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Unscrew the valve cap from tire
valve 7.
왘Screw filler hose 10 onto tire valve 7.
왘Insert electrical plug 4 into vehicle cig-
arette lighter socket.
왘Turn key in steering lock to position 1
(컄page 29).
왘Press I on electric air pump switch 8.
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the tire.
After 5 minutes, the pressure gauge must
display at least 26 psi (1.8 bar). The air
hose can become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
왘If this tire pressure is not attained, turn
off the electric air pump, detach the fill-
er hose from the tire valve, and drive
vehicle back and forth very slowly ap-
proximately 30 ft (10 m).
This serves to better distribute the
TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire.
왘Unscrew the air pump’s air hose 5 from
flange 6 of the TIREFIT container.
왘Inflate the tire again.
왘After attaining a tire pressure of 26 psi
(1.8 bar), press 0 on electric air pump
switch 8.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.
왘Turn key in steering lock to position 0
(컄page 29).
!
Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than eight minutes without in-
terruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again af-
ter it has cooled off.
컄컄
Warning! G
If a tire pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not at-
tained, tire is too severely damaged for
TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire repair.
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal
the tire.
Do not drive the vehicle.
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
237
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Detach the electric air pump.
The air hose may still be hot. Please ex-
ercise appropriate caution.
왘Store the electrical plug and the air
hose behind the flap and place the air
pump back in the trunk.
왘Close the trunk lid.
왘Drive away immediately.
The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself
evenly inside the tire.
왘After driving vehicle for an initial
10 minutes, check tire pressure using
the pressure gauge on the air pump.
Warning! G
Do not exceed vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not
designed to operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the instru-
ment cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics may
change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
Warning! G
If tire pressure has fallen below
20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the
vehicle.
Park your vehicle safely away from the road-
way and contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside Assis-
tance.
If tire pressure is at least 20 psi (1.3 bar), in-
flate tire to correct pressure (see label on
fuel filler flap), and drive vehicle to nearest
tire repair facility to have tire repaired or re-
placed.
Recommended duration of use:
300miles (500km) at 50mph (80km/ h)
with the recommended tire pressure.
Warning! G
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
cause they are more likely to become punc-
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat-
ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
238
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible to obtain a
new TIREFIT kit.
왘Bring used TIREFIT materials to an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
proper disposal.
왘Replace your TIREFIT container every
four years. Replacement containers are
available at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mounting the spare wheel
More information on spare wheels with
collapsible tires can be found in the “Tech-
nical data” section (컄page 265).
Preparing the vehicle
Prepare the vehicle as described under
“Preparing the vehicle” on page
(컄page 229).
왘Turn pump holder counterclockwise to
loosen (컄page 207).
왘Take the spare wheel out of wheel well.
Lifting the vehicle
왘Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘Place one chock in front of and one be-
hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo-
site to the wheel being changed.
When changing wheel on a hill:
왘Place chocks on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the other axle.
왘Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack
out of the trunk.
Warning! G
Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed
to operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the instru-
ment cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics may
change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
Warning! G
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style accord-
ingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted, en-
sure proper tire pressure and do not exceed
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted. 컄컄
239
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap-
proximately one full turn with wrench).
The jack support tubes are located behind
the front wheel housings and in front of the
rear wheel housings.
1Jack tube cover
2Notch
왘Carefully insert the screwdriver (sup-
plied in the tool kit) into notch 2.
왘Pry out cover 1 just so far as you can
place your fingers underneath the cov-
er.
왘Carefully pull out cover 1 completely.
Make sure that the pins do not brake
off.
The cover will be hanging from a plastic
band attached to it.
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into
both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid per-
sonal injury, use the jack only to lift the ve-
hicle during a wheel change. Never get
beneath the vehicle while it is supported by
the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the
area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly
set parking brake and block wheels before
raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always
lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity
jackstands before working under the vehi-
cle.
컄컄
240
Practical hints
Flat tire
3Jacking pin
4Jack support tube hole
5Crank
6Small platform
7Large platform
왘Fold out jacking pin 3 in direction of
arrow A until it snaps into place.
The green marking on the jacking pin
should now form one line with the
marking on the jack.
왘Insert jacking pin 3 in direction of
arrow B fully into jack support tube
hole 4.
왘Keeping jack in this position, turn
crank 5 clockwise until the jack’s small
platform 6 meets the ground. Make
sure that the jack is always vertical
(plumb line).
왘Jack the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
The jack is now standing on large
platform 7.
Never start engine while vehicle is
raised.
Removing the wheel
1Alignment bolt
왘Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and re-
move.
왘Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
왘Remove the remaining bolts.
Warning! G
Insert the jack arm fully into the jack sup-
port tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the
vehicle may fall from the jack and cause per-
sonal injury or damage to the vehicle.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads. 컄컄
241
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Remove the wheel.
왘Take the spare tire out of the trunk.
Mounting the new wheel
Wheel bolts
1 Wheel bolt for
앫wheel rim size 7Jx16 H2 and 8Jx16 H2
앫AMG wheel rim size 71⁄2Jx17 H2 and
81⁄2Jx17 H2
앫spare wheel rim size 41⁄2Bx16 H2
2 Wheel bolt for
앫spare wheel rim size 41⁄2Bx15 H2
(located with electric air pump)
왘Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
왘Guide the spare wheel onto the align-
ment bolt and push it on.
왘Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
왘 Inflate the spare tire using the electric
air pump (컄page 243).
!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting spare wheel rim size
41⁄2Bx15 H2.
The use of any wheel bolts other than
wheel bolts 2 for spare wheel rim size
41⁄2Bx15 H2 can cause physical dam-
age to the vehicle.
Warning! G
Be sure to use original length wheel bolts
when remounting the original wheel after it
has been repaired.
Warning! G
Inflate spare wheel with collapsible tire only
after the wheel is properly mounted.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while in-
stalling first wheel bolt. 컄컄
242
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Lowering the vehicle
왘Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful-
ly on its own weight.
왘Pull the jack out of the jack support
tube.
왘Remove jack tube cover.
1-5 Wheel bolts
왘Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-
ed (1to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft lb
(110 Nm).
Warning! G
Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-
aged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
paired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly
tightened mounting bolts can cause the
wheel to come off. This could cause an acci-
dent. Be sure to use the correct mounting
bolts.
Warning! G
Use only genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identi-
fied by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts
may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
80 ft lb (110 Nm). 컄컄
243
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
should be fully collapsed, with pin and
handle folded in.
Inflating the collapsible spare tire
왘Take the electric air pump out of the
trunk (컄page 207).
1Flap
2Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
3Union nut
4Electrical plug
왘Open flap 1 on air pump.
왘Pull out electrical plug 4 and air hose
with pressure gauge 2.
왘Unscrew valve cap from spare wheel
tire valve.
왘Screw union nut 3 with air hose 2 on to
the tire valve.
왘Insert electrical plug 4 into vehicle
cigarette lighter socket.
왘Turn key in steering lock to position 1
(컄page 29).
왘Press I on the electric air pump switch.
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the tire.
왘Inflate the collapsible tire to around
36 psi (2.5 bar).
This takes about 5 minutes for the col-
lapsible spare tire. Airhose 2 and union
nut 3 can become hot duration infla-
tion.
왘Press 0 on the electric air pump
switch.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.
왘Turn key in steering lock to position 0.
왘If the tire pressure is above 36 psi
(2.5 bar) release excess tire pressure
using the vent screw.
Warning! G
Observe instructions on air pump label.
!
Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than 8 minutes without interrup-
tion. Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again af-
ter it has cooled off.
컄컄
244
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Detach the electric air pump.
왘Reinstall tire valve cap.
왘Stow the electrical plug and the air
hose behind the flap and place the air
pump back in the trunk.
왘Close the trunk lid.
Storing collapsible spare wheel in
wheel well
Before you can store the spare wheel with
collapsible tire in the wheel well you have
to release the air pressure of the tire.
왘Unscrew valve stem removal tool,
which is part of the valve cap, from tire
valve.
왘Using the valve stem removal tool,
open tire valve slightly by turning the
tire valve insert counterclockwise to
release air pressure.
왘When the air pressure has been re-
leased, remove tire valve insert (pro-
tect it from dirt and sand) using the
previously removed tire valve cap.
왘Once all air is out of the tire, and the
tire has collapsed to its original shape,
reinstall the tire valve insert and valve
cap.
왘Place spare wheel in wheel well and
secure it with the pump holder.
왘Turn pump holder clockwise to its stop.
Warning! G
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
cause they are more likely to become punc-
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat-
ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Warning! G
To prevent possible injury when unscrewing
air pump filler hose from tire valve after in-
flating the tire, use a rag since the tire valve
could be hot.
245
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
The battery is located in the engine com-
partment on the right-hand side.
1Battery
2Positive terminal
3Negative terminal
Warning! G
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
sult in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
!
Never loosen or detach battery termi-
nal clamps while the engine is running
or the key is in the steering lock. Other-
wise the alternator and other electronic
components could be severely dam-
aged.
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Service Booklet for mainte-
nance intervals or contact your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
Warning! G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Warning! G
With a disconnected battery
앫you will no longer be able to turn the key
in the steering lock
앫the selector lever will remain locked in
position P
246
Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Open the hood (컄page 171).
왘Disconnect the battery negative
lead 3.
왘Remove the cover 2 from the positive
terminal.
왘Disconnect the battery positive lead.
Removing the battery
왘Remove the screw on the swivel bar.
왘Remove the swivel bar. Take out the
battery.
Charging and reinstalling battery
왘Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
왘Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in re-
verse order.
Reconnecting the battery
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover 2.
왘Connect the negative lead 3.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Warning! G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg-
ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
!
Never invert the terminal connections!
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
i
The following procedures must be car-
ried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnec-
tion):
앫Set the clock (컄page 90).
앫Resynchronize the ESP
(컄page 195).
앫Re-enter the radio code (see radio
operating instructions).
앫Resynchronize side windows
(컄page 128).
247
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the bat-
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow-
ing:
앫Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic convert-
er are cold.
앫Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12V). Jump start-
ing with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle‘s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the Mer-
cedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫Always make sure that the jumper ca-
bles are not on or near pulleys, fans, or
other parts that move when an engine
is started or running.
Warning! G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
!
Jump starting may only be performed
on the battery installed in the engine
compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
tempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine us-
ing a battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several un-
successful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
248
Practical hints
Jump starting
The battery is located in the engine com-
partment on the right hand side.
왘Make sure that the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘Turn off all electrical consumers, ex-
cept hazard warning flashers or work
lights.
왘Apply parking brake.
왘Shift selector lever to position P (man-
ual transmission to Neutral).
1Positive terminal of charged battery
2Positive terminal of discharged battery
3Negative terminal of discharged
battery
4Negative terminal of charged battery
왘Connect positive terminals 1 and 2 of
the batteries with the jumper cables.
Clamp cable to charged battery 1 first.
왘Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘Connect negative terminals 3 and 4 of
the batteries with the jumper cables.
Clamp cable to charged battery 4 first.
왘Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
cle.
Now you can again turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
왘Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 3 and 4 of the bat-
teries and then from positive
terminals 1 and 2.
왘Have the battery checked at the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries.
i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Do not tow-start vehicle.
249
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi-
cle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehi-
cle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Do not tow-start vehicle.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip-
ment with key in starter switch turned
to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄page 72) and the automatic central
locking (컄page 78).
!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
(key in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be
engaged and will apply the rear wheel
brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
be in position N (manual transmission:
gears disengaged) and the key must be
in starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for dis-
tances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50
km/h).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed tow-
ing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts.
250
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning! G
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the key is in
starter switch position 2.
If the key is left in starter switch position 0
for an extended period of time, it can no
longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
key from starter switch and reinsert.
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫the engine will not run
앫there is a malfunction in the power sup-
ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately con-
trol the towed vehicle.
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the braking and steer-
ing systems. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher de-
gree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accord-
ingly.
i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
key in starter switch to position 2 and
activate the combination switch for the
left or right turn signal in the usual
manner – only the selected turn signal
will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the haz-
ard warning flasher will operate again.
!
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the follow-
ing:
With the automatic central locking acti-
vated and the key in starter switch
position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the
left front wheel as well as the right rear
wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of
approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄page 72).
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic cen-
tral locking (컄page 78).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed tow-
ing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chas-
sis, frame or suspension parts.
251
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing eye
SLK 230 Kompressor except Sport
Package*, SLK 320 except Sport
Package*
The rear towing eye is located at the right,
below the bumper.
The front towing eye is located on the pas-
senger-side behind the grille in the bumper
panel.
1Grille SLK 320
except Sport Package*
2Grille SLK 230 Kompressor
except Sport Package*
Removing grille SLK 320
왘Hold left and right end of grille 1 and
pull out firmly.
Installing grille SLK 320
왘Position grille 1 and press securely.
The grille should audibly snap into
place.
Removing grille SLK 230 Kompressor
왘Hold grille 2, fold it down and pull out
firmly.
Installing grille SLK 230 Kompressor
왘Position grille 2 and press securely.
The grille should audibly snap into
place.
i
The selector lever will remain locked in
position P and the key will not turn in
the starter switch if the battery is dis-
connected or discharged. See notes on
the battery (컄page 245) or on jump
starting (컄page 247).
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Manual unlocking of transmission se-
lector lever (컄page 214).
252
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
SLK 32 AMG, Sport Package*
The rear towing eye is located at the right,
below the bumper.
SLK 32 AMG and Sport Package are fitted
with a towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is stored with the jack
in the trunk (컄page 206).
The threaded hole for the towing eye bolt
is located on the passenger-side behind
the grille in the bumper panel.
1Grille SLK 32 AMG, Sport Package*
Removing grille
왘Hold grille 1 (arrow) and pull forward.
Installing towing eye bolt
왘Take towing eye bolt and wheel wrench
out of trunk.
왘Screw towing eye bolt into its stop and
tighten with wheel wrench.
Removing towing eye bolt
왘Loosen towing eye bolt with wheel
wrench.
왘Unscrew towing eye bolt.
왘Store towing eye bolt and wheel
wrench in trunk.
Installing grille
왘Position grille 1 and press securely
The grille should audibly snap into
place.
253
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
A special fuse extractor is supplied with
the vehicle tool kit in the trunk.
Spare fuses are supplied inside the corre-
sponding fuse box.
The fuse chart is printed on the cover of
the corresponding fuse box.
The amperages of the fuses are also given
there.
Main fuse box
The main fuse box is located in the engine
compartment on the left hand side.
The main fuse box contains fuses for
interior consumers.
1Main fuse box
Opening
왘Release clamp (arrow) and lift fuse box
cover 1.
왘Remove fuse box cover.
Closing
왘Fit fuse box cover 1 back into the rear
clamp.
왘Close fuse box cover until the clamp
engages.
i
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rat-
ing.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
254
Practical hints
Fuses
Auxiliary fuse box
The auxiliary fuse box is located on the left
hand side of the exterior lamp switch.
The auxiliary fuse box contains fuses for
lights.
1Auxiliary fuse box
Opening
왘Turn locks (arrows) using a coin and
remove fuse box cover 1.
Closing
왘Reinstall fuse box cover 1 and turn
locks using a coin.
255
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and Tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Consumer information
256
Technical data
Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
Spare parts service
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of original spare parts re-
quired for maintenance and repair work. In
addition, strategically located parts distri-
bution centers provide quick and reliable
parts service.
More than 300000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are
subjected to stringent quality inspections.
Each part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare
parts should be installed.
!
The use of non-genuine parts and ac-
cessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehi-
cle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s dura-
bility or safety.
257
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the “warranties” printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex-
change or repair any defective parts origi-
nally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫New vehicle limited warranty
앫Emission system warranty
앫Emission performance warranty
앫California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont emission control systems
warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re-
placement. It will be mailed to you.
258
Technical data
Identification labels
Identification labels
1Certification label (over driver’s door
lock latch)
2Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
3Engine number (engraved on engine)
4Emission control label
5Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission con-
trol system
6VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
259
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
SLK 230 Kompressor
The SLK 230 Kompressor has two
poly-V-belts.
1Coolant pump
2Idler pulley
3Power steering pump
4Air conditioner compressor
5Crankshaft
6Idler pulley
7Generator (alternator)
8Supercharger
SLK 320
1Idler pulley
2Automatic belt tensioner
3Power steering pump
4Air conditioner compressor
5Crankshaft
6Coolant pump
7Generator (alternator)
SLK 32 AMG
1Idler pulley
2Idler pulley
3Supercharger
4Automatic belt tensioner
5Power steering pump
6Air conditioner compressor
7Crankshaft
8Coolant pump
9Generator (alternator)
260
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model SLK 230 Kompressor
(170.449)1
1The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
SLK 320
(170.465)1
SLK 32 AMG
(170.466)1
Engine 111 112 112
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline
injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline
injection
No. of cylinders 4 6 6
Bore 3.58 in (90.90 mm) 3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3.54 in (89.90 mm)
Stroke 3.48 in (88.40 mm) 3.30 in (84.00 mm) 3.30 in (84.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 140.1 cu.in. (2295 cm3)195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3)195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3)
Compression ratio 8.8:1 10:1 9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 192 hp/5500 rpm
(142 kW/5300 rpm)
215 hp/5700 rpm
(160 kW/5700 rpm)
349 hp/6100 rpm
(260 kW/6100 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to
SAE J 1349
200ft.lb/2500rpm
(270 Nm /2500 rpm)
229ft.lb/3000rpm
(310 Nm /3000 rpm)
333ft.lb/4400rpm
(450 Nm /4400 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 5800 rpm 6000 rpm 6200 rpm
Firing order1-3-4-2 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt 6ft 2in (1875mm) (routingI)
4ft 5in (1355mm) (routingII)
7ft 10in (2390mm) 9ft 6in (2902mm)
261
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Rims and Tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as
앫poor handling characteristics
앫increased noise
앫increased fuel consumption
!
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, ex-
hibit dimensional variations and differ-
ent tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehi-
cle may be the result.
i
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
pressure table is located on the fuel fill-
er cap of the vehicle. The tire pressure
should be checked regularly and
should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Follow tire manufacturer’s mainte-
nance recommendation included with
vehicle.
262
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Same size tires
SLK 230 Kompressor SLK 320 SLK 32 AMG
Rims (light alloy) 7Jx16 H2 7Jx16 H2 71⁄2Jx17 H2
Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm)
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91 H M+S 205/55 R16 91 H M+S 205/50 R17 89 H M+S
225/45 R17 91 H M+S1
1Must not be used with snow chains.
263
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Mixed size tires
SLK 230 Kompressor
Except Sport Package*
SLK 320
Except Sport Package*
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) 7Jx16 H2 7Jx16 H2
Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91 V 205/55 R16 91 W
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) 8Jx16 H2 8Jx16 H2
Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm) 1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 225/50 R16 92 V1225/50 R16 92 W1
1Must not be used with snow chains.
264
Technical data
Rims and Tires
SLK 230 Kompressor, SLK 320
Sport Package*
SLK 32 AMG
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) 71⁄2Jx17 H2 71⁄2Jx17 H2
Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 225/45 R17 91 Y1225/45 R17 91 Y1
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) 81⁄2Jx17 H2 81⁄2Jx17 H2
Wheel offset 1.34 in (34 mm) 1.34 in (34 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/40 R17 91 Y2, 3 245/40 R17 91 Y2, 3
1Also permissible: 225/45 ZR17 91 Y
2Also permissible: 245/40 ZR17 91 Y
3Must not be used with snow chains
265
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Spare wheel with collapsible tire
SLK 230 Kompressor SLK 320
Rim (light alloy) 41⁄2Bx15 H2 41⁄2Bx16 H2
Wheel offset 0.47 in (12 mm) 0.47 in (12 mm)
Collapsible tire 165-15 89 P1165/70-16 92 P1
1Must not be used with snow chains.
i
SLK 3 2 AMG has no spare whe el and is
therefore equipped with TIREFIT.
266
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model SLK 230 Kompressor SLK 320 SLK 32 AMG
Generator (alternator) 14 V/90 A 14 V/115 A 14 V/120 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.1 kW 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/74 Ah 12 V/74 Ah 12 V/74 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F 7 KTCR Bosch F 8 DPER
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2
NGK PFR 5-11
NGK IFR 6D1O
Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)
267
Technical data
Main Dimensions
Main Dimensions
Model SLK 230 Kompressor, SLK 320 SLK 32 AMG
Overall vehicle length 157.9 in (4010 mm) 157.9 in (4010 mm)
Overall vehicle width 67.5 in (1715 mm) 67.5 in (1715 mm)
Overall vehicle height 50.4 in (1279 mm) 50.4 in (1279 mm)
Wheelbase 94.5 in (2400 mm) 94.5 in (2400 mm)
Track, front 58.6 in (1488 mm) 58.6 in (1488 mm)
Track, rear 58.5 in (1485 mm) 58.2 in (1477 mm)
268
Technical data
Weights
Weights
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
269
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
brands tested and recommended by us.
Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser-
vice Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine with oil filter SLK 230 Kompressor 6.1 US qt (5.5 l) Recommended engine oils
SLK 320
SLK 32 AMG
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Automatic transmission*8.5 US qt (8.0 l) MB Automatic Transmission Oil1
1MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10
Manual transmission SLK 230 Kompressor 1.6 US qt (1.5 l) MB Manual Transmission Oil2
2MB part no. 001 989 26 03 10
SLK 320 1.9 US qt (1.8 l)
Rear axle 1.4 US qt (1.3 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90
Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid
Front wheel hubs approx. 1.5oz (43g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system 0.5 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4)
Cooling system SLK 230 Kompressor approx. 9.8 US qt (9.3 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent
SLK 320 approx. 11.8USqt (11.2l)
SLK 32 AMG approx. 15.3USqt (14.5l)
270
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
approx. 15.8 US gal (60.0 l)
approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Air conditioner system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning sys-
tem*
7.4 US qt (7.0 l) MB Windshield washer concentrate1
1Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate“S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshild Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed
windshild washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄page 275).
271
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use
only engine oils recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on recom-
mended brands is available in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Please follow FSS or Service Booklet rec-
ommendations for scheduled oil changes.
Failure to do so could result in engine dam-
age not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may be harmful to the engine opera-
tion.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special
PAG lubricating oil is used in the air condi-
tioning system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based
lubricating oil, otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
ous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bub-
bles in the system, thus reducing the sys-
tem’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be re-
placed every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro-
vide you with additional information.
272
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
meeting ASTM standard D 439:
앫The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane num-
ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE not to exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure etc..
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufac-
turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build up of carbon depos-
its.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:
앫Warm-up hesitation
앫Unstable idle
앫Knocking/pinging
앫Misfire
앫Power loss
Do not blend any specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
costs and may be harmful to engine opera-
tion.
!
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gaso-
line must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
앫Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.
앫Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
앫Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two per-
sons and no luggage.
앫Do not exceed 2/3of maximum ac-
celerator pedal position if the vehi-
cle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
273
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro-
vides:
앫Corrosion protection
앫Freeze protection
앫Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corro-
sion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool-
ant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used
year-round to provide the necessary corro-
sion protection and increase boil over-pro-
tection. You should have it replaced every
15 years or 150000 miles (250000 km),
whichever comes first. Coolant system de-
sign and coolant used stipulate the re-
placement interval. The above
replacement interval is only applicable if
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solu-
tion or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see Facto-
ry Approved Service Products pamphlet)
are used to renew the coolant concentra-
tion or bring it back up to the proper level.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45% anticor-
rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approx. -22°F [-30°C]). If you
use a solution that is more than 55% anti-
corrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to
approx. -49°F [-45°C]), the engine temper-
ature will increase due to the lower heat
transfer capability of the solution. There-
fore, do not use more than this amount of
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used
to bring it up to the proper level (have cool-
ing system checked for signs of leakage).
Please make sure that the mixture is in ac-
cordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, con-
sult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
274
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
nents in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifical-
ly formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorro-
sion/antifreeze coolant will result in a
significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anticorrosion/Anti-
freeze Agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection
–35°F (–37°C) –49°F (–45°C)
SLK 230 Kompressor 4.9 US qt (4.7 l) 5.4 US qt (5.1 l)
SLK 320 5.9 US qt (5.6 l) 6.5 US qt (6.1 l)
SLK 32 AMG 7.7 US qt (7.3 l) 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
275
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield and headlamp* washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp*
washer systems are supplied from the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The windshield and headlamp* washer
fluid reservoir has a capacity of approxi-
mately 7.4 US qt (7.0 l).
왘Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or con-
centrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on am-
bient temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp* washer
fluid mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and water:
앫1 part “S” to100 parts water
[40ml“S” to 1gallon (4l) water]
For temperatures below freezing, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
[40ml“S” to 1gallon (4l) solvent].
Warning! G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts because it may burn.
You can be seriously burned.
276
Technical data
Consumer information
Consumer information
The following text is published as required
of all manufacturers of passenger cars un-
der Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regula-
tions, Part 575 pursuant to the “National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966”.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Tread wear Traction Temperature
200 AA A
Warning! G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straightahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
277
Technical data
Consumer information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
cessive temperatures can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning! G
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
278
279
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is in-
stalled on the passenger seat. The sys-
tem will automatically deactivate the
passenger front airbag when such a
seat is properly installed (indicator
lamp 7 in the center console lights
up). See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the pas-
senger front airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situa-
tions. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service cen-
ter, which can help you with any ques-
tions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a break-
down.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control ve-
hicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passen-
ger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
Collapsible tire
An especially compact spare tire that
must be inflated with a provided air
pump before using. It should only be
used to bring the vehicle to the nearest
service station.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for auto-
matically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
280
Technical terms
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine pro-
duced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (vis-
cosity) of the oil at different tempera-
tures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tol-
erate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and direc-
tional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the sys-
tem's threshold to tighten the seat
belts. ->SRS
FSS
(Flexible Service System)
Service indicator in the speedometer
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special re-
ceivers.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, in-
cluding the tachometer, speedometer,
engine temperature and fuel gauge.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmis-
sion down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehi-
cle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
281
Technical terms
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or un-
locked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gaso-
line's ability to resist undesired detona-
tion (knocking). The average of both
the MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
of the tachometer dial. Avoid this
engine speed range, as it may result in
serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all compo-
nents used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, includ-
ing
앫engine
앫clutch/torque converter
앫transmission
앫drive shaft
앫axle shafts/axles
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmis-
sion between standard operation S and
winter operation W.
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics
Transmission of vehicle data and cur-
rent location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for sub-
scribers to Tele Aid service.
REST
(Residual engine heat utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehi-
cle interior for a short time after the en-
gine has been turned off.
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and
child restraint systems. As indepen-
dent systems, their protective func-
tions complement one another.
282
Technical terms
Retractable hardtop
Hardtop that can be opened and closed
at the push of a button and stored in
the trunk.
Roll bar
Occupant protection system which
consists of tubular steel sheathed in
plastic.
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gaso-
line as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gaso-
line's ability to resist undesired detona-
tion (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission selector le-
ver from being moved out of position P
without key turned and brake pedal de-
pressed.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning de-
vice and airbags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Tele Aid System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and man-
ual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially ac-
tivated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquain-
tance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational pro-
viding that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not dam-
aged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
TIREFIT
Accessory for emergency and tempo-
rary tire repair. The TIREFIT kit consists
of a container with sealant material, a
filler hose, a valve stem tool, a valve in-
sert, and an air compressor.
283
Technical terms
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is ap-
proved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio sys-
tems (radio, CD, etc.).
Wind screen
Screen for deflecting wind from the ve-
hicle interior when the hardtop is low-
ered.
Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more in-
tense light than filament headlamps.
284
285
Index
A
ABS 22, 66, 279
ABS control 67
Malfunction indicator lamp 196
Warning lamp 196
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission* 98
Accident
In case of 46
Activating
Air conditioning 107
Air recirculation mode 105
Anti-theft alarm system 71
Climate control 103
ESP 70
Exterior headlamps 43
Hazard warning flasher 85
Headlamps 43
High beams 85
Ignition 29
Immobilizer 71
Rear window defroster 105
Residual heat 107
Seat heater* 81
Tow-away alarm 72
Windshield wipers 44
Activating automatic central locking 79
Adding
Coolant 176, 177
Engine oil 175
Additional turn signals 221
Adjusting 30
Air distribution 104
Air volume 104
Backrest tilt 32, 33
Exterior rear view mirror 35
Head restraint height 32
Inside rear view mirror 35
Instrument cluster illumination 88
Manual seat 31
Mirrors 35
Seat cushion tilt 33
Seat fore and aft adjustment 31, 33
Seat height 31, 33
Seats 30
Telescoping steering column* 34
Adjusting headlamp aim
Horizontal headlamp aim 227
Vertical headlamp aim 226
Air conditioning 106
Activating 107
Deactivating 106
Air conditioning refrigerant 271
Air distribution
Adjusting 104
Air pressure see Tire inflation
pressure 181
Air recirculation mode 105
Activating 105
Deactivating 105
Air volume
Adjusting 104
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 205
Airbags 53
BabySmart airbag deactivation
system 279
BabySmartTM deactivation
system 62
Children 54
Front 56
Passenger 56
Safety guidelines 55
Side impact 57
Alarm
Audible 65, 71
Canceling 71
Visual 71
286
Index
Alarm system
Anti-theft 71
Alignment bolt 240
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 279
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 274
Antiglare
Automatic 99
Antilock brake system (ABS) 279
Anti-theft alarm system
Arming 71
Canceling alarm 71
Disarming 71
Anti-theft systems 71
Anti-theft alarm system 71
Immobilizer 71
Tow-away alarm 72
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 163
Armrest
Storage compartment 141
Ashtray 142
ATF (automatic transmission fluid)* 176
Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation 111
Button and soft key operation 115
Cassette mode 118
CD mode 120
Operating and display elements 112
Operating safety 111
Operation 115
Radio mode 116
Switching off 115
Switching on 115
Telephone operation 123
Audio systems 111
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 99
Automatic central locking
Activating 79
Deactivating 79
Factory setting 78
Individual setting 79
Automatic lighting control
Activating 86
Deactivating 86
Automatic locking when driving 78
Automatic transmission* 93
Accelerator position 98
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 98
Fluid level 176
Gear ranges 95
Gear selector lever position 96
Gear shifting malfunctions 98
Kickdown 98
Manual shifting 94
One-touch gearshifting 94
Program mode selector switch 97
Selector lever position 93
Starting with 41
Transmission fluid 176
Winter program mode 97
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 62
Compatible child seats 62, 279
Self-test 63
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 279
Backrest tilt 31
Backup lamps 222, 225
Bulbs 222
BAS 68, 279
BAS/ESP
Malfunction indicator lamp 194
Batteries, Remote control
Check lamp 75
Batteries, remote control
Changing 212
287
Index
Battery discharged
Jump starting 247
Battery, vehicle 178, 245
Charging 246
Disconnecting 246
Reconnecting 246
Reinstalling 246
Removing 246
Block heater 184
Bolts
For spare wheel 207
Brake assist system (BAS) 279
Brake fluid 170, 271
Brake lamp bulbs 222
Brake lamp, high mounted 222
Brakes 160
Warning lamp 198
Break-in period 158
Bulbs, replacing 221
Additional turn signals 221
Backup lamps 222
Brake lamps 222
Fog lamps 221
Front lamps 221
High beam 221
High mounted brake lamp 222
License plate lamps 222, 226
Low beam 221
Parking lamps 221, 222, 224
Rear fog lamp 222
Rear fog lamps 225
Side marker lamps 221, 225
Standing lamps 221, 222, 224
Tail lamp assemblies 222, 225
Turn signal lamps 221, 222
Xenon* headlamps 223
Button
Audio system 115
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 279
California
Important notice 9
Calling up
Service indicator 186
CAN system 279
Capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 269
Cargo area see Cargo compartment 77
Cargo compartment
Trunk 77
Casette mode
Playing cassettes 118
Catalytic converter 166
CD changer* 120, 209
CD mode 120
Center console 23
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 205
Lower part 24
Storage compartment 140
Upper part 23
Central locking
From inside 80
Unlocking from inside 80
Certification label 258
Changing CDs 120
Charging
Vehicle battery 246
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
lamp 199
Checking
Coolant level 170, 176
Oil level 170, 172
Tire inflation pressure 170
Vehicle lighting 170
Checking engine oil level
Via engine oil level indicator 173
Via oil dipstick 173
288
Index
Child safety 60
Airbags 54
Infant and child restraint systems 57,
60
Cigarette lighter 143
Cleaning
Cloth upholstery 192
Cup holder 191
Gear selector lever 191
Hard plastic trim items 191
Headliner 192
Instrument cluster 191
Leather upholstery 192
Light alloy wheels 191
Plastic and rubber parts 192
Rear window 190
Seat belts 192
Steering wheel 191
Windows 190
Windshield 45
Wiper blades 190
Cleaning*
Headlamps 100
Climate control 102
Adjusting air distribution 104
Adjusting air volume 104
Air conditioning 106
Air recirculation mode 105
Deactivating the climate control
system 110
Defogging windshield 109
Defrosting 108
Reactivating the climate control
system 110
Rear window defroster 105
Residual heat utilization 107
Residual ventilation 107
Setting the temperature 104
Clock 21
Setting 90
Closing
Glove box 139
Hood 172
Retractable hardtop 215
Side windows 127
Trunk 77
Windows 127
Closing hardtop
In an emergency 215
Cloth upholstery
Cleaning 192
Cockpit 18, 279
Coin holder 142
Collapsible tire 279
Combination switch 84, 85
High beam flasher 44, 85
Turn signals 43
Windshield wipers 44
Consumer information 276
Control and operation of radio
transmitters 166
Coolant 176, 273
Adding 176, 177
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
quantity 273
Capacities 269
Checking level 176
Temperature 167
Temperature gauge 88
Coolant level
Checking 170, 176
Cruise control 136, 279
Canceling 137
Driving downhill 137
Driving uphill 137
Fine adjustment 138
Saving current speed 137
Setting speeds 138
289
Index
Cruise control lever 136
For cruise control 136
Cup holder 140
Cleaning 191
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 279
D
Daytime running lamp mode 83
Deactivating
Air conditioning 106
Air recirculation mode 105
Alarm 71
Anti-theft alarm system 71
Climate control 103
Cruise control 137
ESP 70
Hazard warning flasher 85
Headlamps 48
Immobilizer 71
Rear window defroster 105
Residual heat 107
Seat heater* 81
Tow-away alarm 72
Deactivating automatic central
locking 79
Deep water see Standing water 165
Defogging
Windshield 109
Defrosting 108
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while
driving 45
With starting 41
Direction of rotation (tires) 181
Discharged battery
Jump starting 247
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 246
Display elements
Audio system 112
Displays
Service indicator 185
Door unlock
With Tele Aid 151
Doors
Opening from inside vehicle 78
Opening from outside 75
Downhill driving
Cruise control 137
Downshifting 92, 94
Drink holder see Cup holder 140
Drinking and driving 159
Driving
General instructions 37, 159
In winter 164
Problems 45
Safety systems 66
Through standing water 165
Traveling abroad 165
Driving instructions 159
Driving off 161
Driving safety systems
ABS 66
BAS 68
ESP 68
Driving systems 136
Cruise control 136
Driving safety systems 66
E
Electrical fuses 253
Electrical system
Technical data 266
Electronic Stability Program see ESP 22,
68
Electronic stability program see ESP 280
Emergency call system 145
Requirements 145
290
Index
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 147
With Tele Aid 146
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 98
Emergency operations
Closing hardtop 215
Opening hardtop 215
Remote door unlock 151
Unlocking the vehicle 210
Emergency release for trunk lid 78
Emergency tensioning device see
ETD 60, 280
Emission control 167
Emission control label 258
Engine
Compartment 171
Starting with automatic
transmission* 41
Starting with manual
transmission 40
Starting with the key 40, 41
Technical data 260
Turning off with the key 48
Engine cleaning 189
Engine compartment 171
Hood 171
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 21,
199
Engine number 280
Engine oil 172, 271
Adding 175
Additives 271
Checking level 172
Consumption 172
Filler neck 175
Viscosity 280
Engine oil level see Oil level 170
ESP 22, 68, 280
Switching off 70
Switching on 70
Warning lamp 194
ETD 280
Safety guidelines 55
ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 60
Exterior lamp switch 83
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 35
F
Fastening the seat belts 37
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 138
First aid kit 206
Flat tire 229
Lowering the vehicle 242
Mounting the spare wheel 238
Preparing the vehicle 229
Spare wheel 207
TIREFIT 208, 209
Flexible Service System (FSS) 185, 280
Fog lamp, rear 84, 222
Fog lamps
Replacing bulbs 221
Fog lamps, front
Replacing bulbs 222
Switching on 84
Front airbags 56
Front lamps
Replacing bulbs 221, 223
Switching on 83
Front seats
Heater* 81
FSS (Flexible Service System) 185, 280
291
Index
Fuel 169
Additives 272
Fuel reserve warning lamp 201
Gasoline additives 272
Premium unleaded gasoline 169,
272
Requirements 272
Reserve warning 21
Technical data 269
Fuel additives 272
Fuel filler flap 169
Locking 169
Opening 213
Unlocking 169
Fuel requirements 272
Fuel tank
Capacity 270
Filler flap 169
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities 269
Fuse chart 253
Fuse extractor 253
Fuses 253
Auxiliary fuse box 254
Fuse chart 253
Fuse extractor 253
Main fuse box 253
Spare fuses 253
G
Garage door opener 25, 152
Erasing in remote control 155
Integrated remote control 153
Rolling code programming 154
Gasoline see Fuel 169
Gasoline additives 272
Gear range 280
Automatic transmission* 95
Limiting 95
Shifting into optimal 94
Gear range limit
Canceling 94
Gear selector lever
Cleaning 191
Position 96
Global
Locking 75
Unlocking 75
Global Positioning System (GPS) 280
Glove box 19, 139
Closing 139
Opening 139
Good visibility 99
GPS 280
H
Hand-held transmitter
Programming integrated remote
control 153
Hands-free microphone 25
Hard plastic trim items
Cleaning 191
Hazard warning flasher 85
Switching off 85
Switching on 85
Head restraints 82
Installing 82
Manual seats 32
Removing 82
Headlamp cleaning system 179
Headlamps
Cleaning 189
Cleaning system 179
Cleaning system* 100
Refilling washer fluid 179
Switching off 48
Switching on 43
Washer fluid 275
Washer system 275
Xenon* 283
292
Index
Headliner
Cleaning 192
Heated seats* 81
Height adjustment
Head restraints 32
Telescoping steering column* 34
High beam flasher 44, 85
High beam headlamps
Replacing bulbs 221, 223
Switching on 85
High mounted brake lamp 222
Hood 171
Closing 172
Opening 171
Hydroplaning 163
I
Identification labels 258
Certification label 258
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) 258
Ignition 29
Switching on 40, 41
Immobilizer 71
Activating 71
Deactivating 71
Infant and child restraint systems 60
Information
About service and warranty 8
Button for Tele Aid 149
Inside rear view mirror
Adjusting 35
Installing
Towing eye bolt 252
Wiper blades 228
Instrument cluster 20, 88, 280
Cleaning 191
Coolant temperature gauge 88
Illumination 88
Lamps in 201
Outside temperature indicator 90
Instruments and controls see Cockpit 18
Integrated remote control
Canadian programming 154
Erasing memory 155
Hand-held transmitter 153
Operating 155
Rolling code programming 154
Interior lighting 86
Activating automatic control 86
Automatic control 86
Deactivating automatic control 86
Manual control 87
Manual operation 87
Interior storage spaces 139
Cup holder 140
Glove box 139
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell 141
Storage compartment in armrest 141
Storage compartment in center
console 140
J
Jack 206
Jump starting 247
K
Key 210
Positions in steering lock 29
Remote control 74
Starting the engine 40, 41
Key positions in steering lock 29
Key, Remote control
Loss of 77
Keys 74
Kickdown 98, 280
L
Labels, identification 258
Lamp bulbs, exterior 221
293
Index
Lamps, exterior
Front 221
Rear 222
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 196
Airbag Off 56
Battery (Remote control) 75
Brakes 198
CHECK ENGINE 199
Engine diagnostics 199
ESP 194
Fuel reserve 201
Instrument cluster 201
Seat belts 199
Service indicator 185
SRS 52
Turn signals 21
Lamps, malfunction indicator
BAS/ESP 194
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 259
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 192
License plate lamps
Replacing bulbs 222, 226
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 191
Technical data 262
Lighter see Cigarette lighter 143
Lighting 83
Combination switch 85
Daytime running lamp mode 83
Exterior lamp switch 83
Front fog lamps 84
High beam flasher 85
High beams 85
Instrument cluster illumination 88
Interior 86
Low beam 83
Parking lamps 83
Rear fog lamp 84
Trunk 87
Limiting the gear range 95
Limp Home Mode 98
Lock buttons 281
Locking 47, 74
Centrally from inside 80
Driver’s door and trunk in an
emergency 211
Fuel filler flap 169
Global, Remote control 75
Loss of keys 77
Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 257
Low beam headlamps
Replacing bulbs 221, 223
Lowering
Vehicle 242
Lubricants
Technical data 269
M
Main dimensions 267
Maintenance 10, 185
Manual operations
Fuel filler flap 213
Hardtop 215
Interior lighting control 87
Locking the driver’s door and
trunk 211
Unlocking the driver’s door 210
Unlocking the trunk 210
Unlocking transmission selector
lever 214
Manual seat
Adjusting 31
Adjusting backrest tilt 32
Adjusting head restraint height 32
Adjusting seat height 31
Seat fore and aft adjustment 31
294
Index
Manual transmission 91
Shifting into reverse 92
Starting with 40
Microphone
Hands-free microphone 25
Mirrors
Adjusting 35
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 99
Exterior rear view mirror 35
Inside rear view mirror 35
MON 169
MON (Motor Octane Number) 281
N
Night security illumination 87
O
Occupant safety 52
Airbags 53
Children and airbags 54
Children in the vehicle 60
Fastening the seat belt 37
Infant and child restraint systems 60
Seat belts 37, 55
Odometer, main 21
Oil
Adding 175
Checking level 172
Consumption 172
Dipstick 172
Filler neck 175
Viscosity 280
Oil level
Checking 170
One-touch gearshifting 94
Canceling gear range limit 94
Downshifting 94
Upshifting 94
Opening
Ashtray 142
Doors from the inside 78
Fuel filler flap 169
Fuel filler flap manually 213
Glove box 139
Hardtop in an emergency 215
Hood 171
Retractable hardtop 215
Side windows 127
Trunk 77
Windows 127
Operating
Audio system 111
Garage door opener 155
Integrated remote control 155
Radio transmitters 166
Safety 14
Telephone 111
Telephone* 123
Vehicle outside the USA and
Canada 11
Operating safety 14
Audio system 111
Operator’s Manual 8
Ornamental moldings 189
Outside temperature indicator 90
Overdue service 186
Overhead control panel 25
Overspeed range 281
P
Paintwork 188
Panic alarm 65
Panic button on remote control 65
Parcel net
In front passenger footwell 141
Parking 47, 161
Parking brake 42, 47
Engaging 47
Releasing 42
295
Index
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs 221, 222, 224
Switching on 83
Parts see Spare parts service 256
Passenger compartment 165
Inside rear view mirror 35
Interior lighting 86
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell 141
Passenger safety see Occupant
safety 52
Pedals 159
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 192
Playing
CDs 122
Poly-V-belt drive 281
Layout 259
Power assistance 160
Power seat*
Adjusting backrest tilt 33
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 33
Adjusting seat height 33
Seat fore and aft adjustment 33
Power train 281
Power washer 188
Power windows 127
Side windows 127
Stopping windows 128
Synchronizing 128
Practical hints
First aid kit 206
Fuses 253
Lamp in center console 205
Lamps in instrument cluster 194
Spare wheel 207
Spare wheel bolts 207
TIREFIT 208, 209
Towing the vehicle 249, 251, 252
Vehicle tool kit 206
Premium unleaded gasoline 272
Problems
While driving 45
With vehicle 15
Product information 7
Program mode selector switch 281
Automatic transmission* 97
R
Radio mode 116
Radio see Radio mode
Radio transmitters, control and
operation 166
Rapid seat heating*
Switching on 81
Rear fog lamp 222
Bulb 222
Switching on 84
Rear lamp bulbs
Replacing 225
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 99
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window
Cleaning 190
Rear window defroster 105
Activating 105
Deactivating 105
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 246
Refrigerant
Air conditioning 271
Regular checks 170
Reinstalling vehicle battery 246
296
Index
Remote control
Battery check lamp 75
Changing batteries 212
Checking the batteries 76
Global locking 75
Key 74
Restoring to factory setting 75
Selective setting 75
Unlocking with 28
Remote control with folding key
Locking and unlocking 74
Remote control, key
Factory setting 75
Global unlocking 75
Remote controls
Integrated 153
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid 151
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 281
Removing
Vehicle battery 246
Wheel 240
Wiper blade insert 228
Wiper blades 228
Replacing
Backup lamp bulbs 225
Brake lamp bulbs 225
Bulbs 221
Front lamp bulbs 223
Front turn signal bulbs 223
Fuses 253
High beam bulbs 223
License plate lamp bulbs 226
Low beam bulbs 223
Parking lamp bulbs 224
Rear fog lamp bulbs 225
Rear lamp bulbs 222, 225
Rear turn signal bulbs 225
Side marker lamp bulbs 225
Standing lamp bulbs 224
Wiper blades 228
Replacing, Bulbs
Xenon* headlamps 223
Reporting
Safety defects 16
Resetting
Service indicator (FSS) 186
Trip odometer 89
Residual heat utilization 107, 281
Residual ventilation 107
REST (Residual engine heat
utilization) 281
Restraint system 281
Restraint system see Infant and child re-
straint systems 60
Retractable hardtop 129, 282
Closing 132, 215
Locking after raising/lowering 133
Opening 131, 215
Problems when operating 133
Reverse (manual transmission)
Shifting into 92
Rims 261
Roadside assistance 10
Tele Aid 148
Roll bar 282
Rolling code programming 154
RON 169
RON (Research Octane Number) 282
Rotating wheels 182
Rubber parts
Cleaning 192
S
Safety
Occupant 52
Safety belts see Seat belts 37
Safety defects
Reporting 16
297
Index
Safety systems
Driving 66
Saving current speed 137
Seat belts 57
Cleaning 192
Fastening 37
Proper use of 39, 59
Safety guidelines 55
Warning lamp 199
Seat heater*
Switching off 81
Switching on 81
Seats 81
Adjusting 30
Heater* 81
Manual 31
Rapid seat heating* 81
Selector lever 21
Lock 41
Position (automatic
transmission*) 21, 93
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 63
Tele Aid* 145
Service
Calling up the service indicator 186
Major service (Service B) 185
Minor service (Service A) 185
Overdue 186
Spare parts 256
Types 186
When due 185
Service (maintenance) 185
Service and Warranty Booklet
Loss of 257
Service and warranty information 8
Service indicator 185
Calling up 186
Clearing 185, 186
Service life (tires) 181
Service System see FSS 185
Setting
Clock 90
Cruise control 137
Higher speed in cruise control 138
Lower speed in cruise control 138
Slower speed in cruise control 138
Speed in cruise control 138
Temperature (interior) 104
Settings
Factory, Remote control 75
Selective 75
Shelf behind roll bar 141
Shift lock 282
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 96
Gearshift lever 91
Into optimal gear range (automatic
transmission*) 94
Into reverse (manual
transmission) 92
Side impact airbags 57
Side marker lamps
Replacing bulbs 221, 222, 225
Side windows
Automatic opening 127
Cleaning 190
Closing 127
Opening 127
Opening fully 127
Synchronizing power windows 128
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Windshield wipers 45
Single wipe 45
Snow chains 184
Soft keys
Audio system 115
298
Index
Spare fuses 253
Spare parts service 256
Spare wheel 207
Bolts 207
Mounting 238
Speed
Saving current 137
Speed settings
Cruise control 138
Speedometer 21
SRS 59, 282
Indicator lamp 197
Standing lamps 83
Replacing bulbs 221, 222, 224
Standing water
Driving instructions 165
Starting difficulties 41
Starting position 29
Starting the engine 40
Steering column
Height adjustment 34
Length adjustment 34
Steering lock 19, 29
Positions 29
Steering wheel
Adjustment 34
Cleaning 191
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 152
Storage compartments 140
Armrest 141
Center console 140
Glove box 139
Sun visors 101
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) 282
Switching off
Audio system 115
Engine 48
ESP 70
Hazard warning flasher 85
Headlamps 48
Seat heating* 81
Switching on
Audio system 115
ESP 70
Front fog lamps 84
Hazard warning flasher 85
Headlamps 43
High beams 85
Rapid seat heating* 81
Rear fog lamp 84
Seat heating* 81
Windshield wipers 44
Synchronizing
Power windows 128
Synchronizing the remote control 213
T
Tachometer 21, 89
Displaying gear range 95
Overspeed range 89
Tail lamps
Cleaning 189
Replacing bulbs 222, 225
Tar stains 188
Technical data 271
Brake fluid 271
Coolant 269
Coolants 273
Electrical system 266
Engine 260
Engine oil 271
Engine oil additives 271
Fuel requirements 272
Fuels 269
Gasoline additives 272
Lubricants 269
Main dimensions 267
299
Index
Premium unleaded gasoline 272
Rims and tires 261
Weights 268
Windshield and headlamp washer*
system 270, 275
Tele Aid 144
Emergency calls 146
Information 149
Initiating an emergency call
manually 147
Remote door unlock 151
Roadside assistance 148
Stolen vehicle tracking services 152
System self-check 145
Tele Aid System 145
Upgrade signals 150
Tele Aid System 282
Telephone* 143
Hands-free microphone 25
Operation 123
Telescoping steering column*
Adjusting 34
Temperature
Grades of tires 277
Setting interior temperature 104
Tires 182
Tightening torque 282
Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 242
Tire inflation pressure 236
Checking 170, 181
Tire speed rating 163, 283
Tire traction 163
TIREFIT 282
TIREFIT kit
Sealing tires with TIREFIT 229, 234
TIREFIT kit 1 229
TIREFIT kit 2 234
TIREFIT-Kit
Adding TIREFIT 231
Inflating the tire 232
Preparing TIREFIT 230, 235
Tires 180, 261
Collapsible 279
Consumer information 276
Direction of rotation 181
Driving instructions 162
Retreads 180
Rims and tires 261
Service life 181
Temperature 182
Temperature grades 277
Tread depth 183
Wear pattern 182
Winter 183
Tools 206
Tow-away alarm 23, 72
Arming 72
Disarming 72
Disarming for transport 72
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit)
Installing 252
Towing the vehicle 249, 251, 252
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 152
Traction 97, 276, 283
Transmission see Automatic
transmission* 176
Transmission selector lever 214
Unlocking manually 214
Traveling abroad 165
Tread depth (tires) 183
Treadwear 276
Trip odometer
Resetting 89
Trunk
Closing 77
Lighting 87
Opening 77
300
Index
Trunk lid emergency release 78
Trunk see Cargo compartment 77
Turn signal lamps
Replacing bulbs 221, 222
Turn signals 43
Additional in mirrors 221
Cleaning lenses 189
Front bulbs 221, 224
Indicator lamps 21
Rear bulbs 222, 225
Turning off
Engine 48
U
Unlocking 28, 74
Centrally from inside 80
Driver’s door in an emergency 210
Fuel filler flap 169
Global 75
In an emergency 210
Selective settings 75
Transmission selector lever
manually 214
Trunk in an emergency 210
Vehicle in an emergency 151
With the remote control 28
Upgrade signals
Tele Aid 150
Uphill driving
Cruise control 137
Upshifting 94
Useful features 139
Ashtray 142
Cigarette lighter 143
Garage door opener 152
Interior storage spaces 139
Tele Aid 144
Telephone* 143
V
Vehicle
Battery 245
Locking 23
Lowering 242
Proper use of 14
Towing 249, 251, 252
Unlocking 23
Unlocking in an emergency 210
Vehicle battery 245
Vehicle care 187
Cloth upholstery 192
Cup holder 191
Engine cleaning 189
Gear selector lever 191
Hard plastic trim items 191
Headlamps 189
Instrument cluster 191
Leather upholstery 192
Light alloy wheels 191
Ornamental moldings 189
Paintwork 188
Plastic and rubber parts 192
Power washer 188
Rear window cleaning 190
Seat belts 192
Steering wheel 191
Tail lamps 189
Tar stains 188
Turn signals 189
Vehicle washing 189
Window cleaning 190
Wiper blades 190
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 258
Vehicle lighting
Checking 170
Vehicle tool kit 206
Alignment bolt 206
Spare fuses 206
Special fuse puller 206
Towing eye bolt 206
301
Index
Vehicle jack 206
Wheel bolts 206
Wheel wrench 206
Vehicle washing 189
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 258,
283
Voice control system* 25, 283
Hands-free microphone 25
W
Warning sounds
Drivers seat belts 57
Parking brake 42
Warranty coverage 257
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing the vehicle 187
Wear pattern (tires) 182
Weights 268
Wheel change
Tightening torque 242
Wheels
Rotating 182
Tires and wheels 180
Wind screen 134, 283
Installing 134
Removing 135
Windows see Side windows
Windshield
Defogging 109
Refilling washer fluid 179
Replacing wiper blades 228
Washer fluid 179, 275
Washer system 275
Windshield washer fluid 275
Filler neck 179
Mixing ratio 275
Refilling 179
Wiping with 45
Windshield washer system 275
Windshield wipers 44
Fast wiper speed 44
Replacing wiper blades 228
Single wipe 45
Switching on 44
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 45
Winter driving 183
Block heater 184
Snow chains 184
Tires 183
Transmission program mode 97
Winter driving instructions 164
Winter tires 183
Wiper blades
Cleaning 190
Installing 228
Removing 228
Removing insert 228
Replacing 228
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 45
Interval 44
With windshield washer fluid 45
X
Xenon headlamps* 283
302
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We con-
sider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Re-
printing, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2290-31
Press time 11/04/02
GSP/SIP
Printed in Germany
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Navigation menu